JP7071658B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a bullet game machine having a game area in which a game ball is launched.

Conventionally, among various types of ball game machines, the so-called first-class pachinko game machine has a plurality of symbols changed in a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided in the substantially center of the game board. Display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display", etc.). This gaming machine shifts to a special game called a big hit, in which more prize balls can be obtained than in a normal game when the combination of symbols when the movement of symbols in multiple rows is stopped becomes a specific mode. Known as a thing. In the variable display of symbols in the display area, not only a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed, but also the variable display time is usually set in a state where one more symbol is aligned and a big hit is obtained, as in the so-called reach screen. The production is designed to raise the expectations of the player, such as making it longer than that. In addition, the player's expectation is raised by the effect of using characters in images such as patterns to give a story to the variable display and the advance notice effect that suggests the high degree of expectation for transition to special games. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-70532

Conventionally, a flat image has been displayed on a liquid crystal display device of a gaming machine. In recent years, as the size of liquid crystal display devices and movable accessories has increased, there is a demand for more powerful content as a display image. For that purpose, it is possible to introduce a device such as a 3D liquid crystal display, but considering the increase in hardware cost, it is desirable to diversify the powerful production by improving the software and improving the control efficiency as much as possible. ..

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving control efficiency and diversifying effects.

In order to solve the above problems, the ball game machine of a certain aspect of the present invention is provided with a game board in which a game area is formed and a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of the game ball triggers a lottery. The winning / failing lottery is executed based on the lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from the normal game to the special game which is in a state advantageous to the player, triggered by the starting winning opening and the entry into the starting winning opening. A winning / failing lottery means, a symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery is variablely displayed, and a variable pattern determining means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variable patterns in which the variable display process of the symbol is defined. , An effect display device for displaying the effect content, an effect determination means for determining the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device, and an effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device. And. As the effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included, and the first image is a predetermined mode. It is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a special first image transformed into a shape and a second image not transformed into a predetermined mode, and if a predetermined error occurs, a warning image indicating that a predetermined error has occurred. When the special effect is started to be executed under the condition that the warning image is displayed due to the occurrence of a predetermined error before the execution of the special effect is started, the warning image is not transformed into the predetermined mode. The display is continued while maintaining the display mode before the start of execution of the special effect.

It should be noted that any combination of the above components, and those in which the components and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media containing computer programs, data structures, and the like are also used. , Is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to the ball gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving control efficiency and diversifying effects.

It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the front side of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the basic structure on the back side of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the functional block of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of a main board. It is a figure which shows the hit / fail determination table schematically. It is a figure which shows typically the range setting of the winning / failing lottery value for each set value. It is a figure which shows schematically the symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table schematically. It is a figure which shows typically the advance hit / fail determination table referred to in the advance hit / fail judgment. It is a figure which shows schematically the advance hit / fail judgment table corresponding to a game setting. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a sub-board. It is a figure which shows the outline of the mobile cooperation system schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware composition of a main board and a sub board schematicly. It is a block diagram which shows the hardware composition of the staging control device schematicly. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing of the main board in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S120 in FIG. 15 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of an interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the control start process of a sub-board in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of S518 in FIG. 20 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the command is received from the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt process when the timer interrupt for various device control occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the special symbol variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the decorative pattern variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special game. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a small hit game. It is a figure which shows the screen example of the staging display device. It is a figure which shows typically the example of shrinkage of a frame image in a screen deformation effect. It is a figure which shows typically the example of the swing of a frame image in a screen deformation effect. It is a figure which shows typically the layer structure of the staging screen in a screen deformation staging. It is a figure which shows typically the process of the movable character effect which is executed in parallel with the screen deformation effect. It is a figure which shows typically a plurality of buffer areas which divided a frame buffer. It is a figure which shows typically the relationship between the display size of a frame image, and the capacity of a frame buffer area. It is a figure which shows typically the process of deforming a frame image stored in a buffer area. It is a figure which shows the screen example of the 3rd special effect pattern. It is a figure which shows typically the process of using the buffer area in the 3rd special effect pattern.

(Prerequisite technology)
In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed. The second game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed at the same time. Further, in order to achieve both of these playability, a plurality of start winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, and a plurality of hold lamps are provided. It is designed so that the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of becoming a big hit with a probability change, and the second game has a larger number of unit games constituting a special game when a big hit occurs (opening time of the big winning opening). A long open unit game and a short open unit game with a short open time are mixed in one special game, and even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game is a longer open unit game than the first game. The second game is designed to have a relatively higher profit than the first game, such as (including the case where the number of games is large). On top of that, at first, aim for the first hit in the first game, and after the big hit in the first game gives a time reduction, aim for the second game repeatedly and get a lot of balls. Realize.

FIG. 1 shows a basic structure on the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 100 is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. The gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball plate 105, a lower ball plate 106, a firing handle 107, a speaker 108, an effect button 109, and a cross key 110. Includes decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 has an opening portion and is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 100 at a position where it should be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate 105 has a mechanism for storing the game ball, sending the game ball to the launch rail, extracting the game ball from the lower ball plate 106, and the like. The lower ball plate 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and sound effects and music sounds according to the game state and the effect are output by means for controlling the effect. Most of the resin members constituting the appearance of the door 104 are translucent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent member. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game state, the effect, etc. by means for controlling the effect, and plays a role of the effect by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning opening 33 on a game area 81 partitioned by a rail 82. , Out port 34, effect display device 60, center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over substantially the central portion of the game area 81 and the upper portion and the right portion thereof, and is a flow path of the game ball and the effect display device. It has 60 functions such as protection and decoration. A stage 65 on which the inflowing game ball rolls is formed at the lower part of the center decoration 64, and the falling direction from the stage 65 is the direction of entering the first starting port 11 and the first starting port 11 depending on the rolling method. It is distributed to the side direction that does not enter the ball. At the upper part of the center decoration 64, a movable accessory 66 that is driven according to the content of the effect and performs an effect is provided. In the game area 81, a plurality of mechanisms such as game nails and windmills (not shown) for forming a flow path of the game ball are installed. In this specification, "winning ball", "winning prize", and "falling in" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning opening and each entry opening may be composed of a type of "passing opening" (also referred to as "gate" or "through chucker") through which a game ball passes, and "entry ball". "Winning," "falling in," and "passing" may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting port 11 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first game, and the second starting opening 12 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that it is possible to aim for one of the ball depending on the launch strength of the game ball according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided at a substantially central lower portion in the game area 81, and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11. Left-handed, that is, when the ball is hit relatively weakly aiming to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, while right-handed. That is, when the ball is hit relatively strongly aiming to flow to the right passage of the center decoration 64, the ball can enter the second starting port 12 or is easy to enter, but cannot enter the first starting port 11. Alternatively, a flow path is formed by arranging the game nails so as to make it difficult to enter the ball. However, since the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is normally covered with the first starting port 11 and the inflow of the game ball is hindered, the second starting port is not opened unless the expanding mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball at 12. The winning / failing lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player, and is executed every time a ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. To.

It should be noted that the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to such an extent that it is possible to strike a target at any of them depending on the firing strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be installed separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, respectively, so that it is difficult for a game ball aimed at one to enter the other. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when it is left-handed, that is, when it is aimed to flow to the left passage of the center decoration 64 and fired relatively weakly. The second starting port 12 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when it is hit right-handed, that is, when it is aimed to flow to the right passage of the center decoration 64 and fired relatively strongly.

The first starting port 11 includes a first starting winning detection device 16. The first start winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates first starting winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting winning detection device 17, an ordinary electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) which is an expansion mechanism, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 90. Be prepared. The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates second starting winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The first operating port 31 is provided at a position on the left side of the game area 81, and includes the first passage detecting device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The second operating port 32 is provided at a position on the right side of the game area 81, and includes a second passage detecting device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operating port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The passage of the game ball through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an open lottery to determine whether or not to expand the ordinary electric accessory 90. When the game ball passes through the first operating opening 31 or the second operating opening 32, the normal symbol, which is a symbol showing the determination result of the open lottery, is variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. Therefore, the open lottery is also called "ordinary symbol lottery". After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stops. When the normal symbol stops at the hit symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91, and the possibility of entering the second starting port 12 is increased. As a modification, the number of operating ports may be one, and the game area 81 may be provided at the left side position.

Each of the three general winning openings 33 includes a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry.

The large winning opening 20 includes a large winning opening detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a large winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large winning opening 20. The large prize detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20, and generates large prize opening winning information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The big winning opening 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning opening that is opened as a "big hit" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined mode. The large winning opening 20 is provided at a position on the upper right side of the out opening 34. As a modification, another large winning opening may be provided at the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the large winning opening 20, and a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. The out port 34 is an outlet for discharging a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings, and is provided with an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball that is discharged through the out port 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out opening 34 is provided at the lowermost center portion of the game area 81 so that all the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings can be guided and passed through. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be provided side by side while securing a game ball passage having a sufficient width to prevent the ball clogging of the out port 34.

A symbol display unit 120 is arranged below the outside of the game area 81 in the game board 80. The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display unit 41, a second special symbol display unit 42, a first special symbol hold display unit 71, a second special symbol hold display unit 72, a normal symbol display unit 45, and a normal diagram. Each display unit such as a hold display unit 75, a game status display unit 76, and an abnormality notification unit 77 is provided. Specifically, the first special symbol display unit 41 corresponding to the first game and the second special symbol display unit 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the first special symbol Changes in 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, and is a special game when the game is stopped in a predetermined hit mode. A big hit will occur. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12, and is a special game when the game is stopped in a predetermined hit mode. A big hit will occur. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are, for example, an eight-segment LED composed of eight segments of seven segments forming a "figure 8" and one segment representing a "dot". It is a display device of. With an 8-segment LED, a numerical value for 8 bits can be expressed by combining 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 represented by the combination of segments do not necessarily form the body of letters or numbers, and may be symbols having no meaning in general formed by the combination of each segment. .. These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42, or a predetermined display (for example, "-") and non-display (for example, all lights are turned off) are displayed. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after being repeated for a predetermined time, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. It should be noted that the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 use LED dot arrays that are not 8-segment LEDs, and a plurality of types of first special symbol 51 and second are used depending on the combination of lighting patterns and lighting colors. The special symbol 52 may be expressed.

Further, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have to have a staging role, in this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol at the lower left of the game area 81 are used. The display unit 42 displays the image in an inconspicuous size. However, when adopting a method of expressing the special symbol without using a decorative symbol by giving it a staging role, the special symbol is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It may be configured to make it.

A first special symbol hold display unit 71 is provided above the first special symbol display unit 41 as a hold lamp for special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first game, and a second special symbol display unit 42 is provided above the second special symbol display unit 42. A second special symbol hold display unit 72 is provided as a hold lamp for the special symbol change corresponding to the game of. The first special figure reservation display unit 71 is composed of two lamps, and the number of the winning / failing lottery values held in the first game depending on the number of lighting or the number of blinking lamps (hereinafter, the number of holdings of the winning / failing lottery value). Simply display (also referred to as "pending number"). The number of holds in the first special figure hold display unit 71 is the number (number) of acquisition of lottery values based on winning a prize in the first start port 11 while the first special symbol 51 is changing or the special game is being executed. Indicates the number of winning balls that are present and the symbol change has not yet been executed. The second special figure hold display unit 72 is also composed of two lamps, and displays the number of holdes in the second game according to the number of lights or the number of blinks. The number of holdings in the second special symbol holding display unit 72 is the number of times (number) of acquisition of lottery values based on winning a prize in the second starting port 12 while the second special symbol 52 is changing or the special game is being executed. Indicates the number of winning balls that are present and the symbol change has not yet been executed. The number of holdings of the winning / failing lottery value is also displayed at the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 60 in a form represented by the number of lighting of the holding lamp image.

A normal symbol display unit 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120. The ordinary symbol display unit 45 is composed of two lamps for convenience, and the display state of the ordinary symbol is expressed by the lighting combination thereof. First, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is expressed by blinking the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, and finally the stop symbol of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of the lighting state of the first lamp and the second lamp. Is expressed. For example, turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp expresses the off-stop symbol, and turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp expresses the first hit mode, and the first. The second hit mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

Further, on the right side of the normal symbol display unit 45, a normal symbol hold display unit 75 is provided as a hold lamp for the normal symbol change. The normal symbol hold display unit 75 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of hold of normal symbol fluctuations according to the number of lamps lit or the number of blinks. The number of reserved normal symbol changes is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during the change of the normal symbol, and the number of normal symbol lottery for which the normal symbol change has not yet been executed. Is shown.

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game status display unit 76 and an abnormality notification unit 77. The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays a game state such as a specific game state, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game status is notified by turning on the lamp when the probability is fluctuating, blinking when the ball is easy to enter, and turning off when the normal state is in the normal state, and the 7-segment LED is displayed during the execution of the special game. Displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies a part of the abnormality of the gaming machine, and is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps, and notifies the abnormality by a lighting pattern according to the type of abnormality. It should be noted that these display units may not be centrally arranged in the symbol display unit 120, and each display unit may be individually configured, or may be divided into a plurality of display devices that are appropriately integrated. Further, the notification of the gaming state such as the specific gaming state may be configured to be performed only for a predetermined period such as a certain time after the power is restored from the power failure.

At the substantially center of the game area 81, an effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and the decorative symbol 61 linked to the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 is provided. The fluctuation of the including effect image is displayed. Hereinafter, such a display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display" or the like.

The effect display device 60 is a display device including a liquid crystal display that variablely displays the decorative symbol 61 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52. The decorative symbol 61 is a symbol for visually producing the determination result display of the lottery shown by the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. As the decorative symbol 61, the effect display device 60 displays, for example, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of symbols imitating a game of a slot machine are varied in a central region of the screen. In this embodiment, the symbols composed of the numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in three columns and varied, and the combination of the three symbols finally stopped and displayed indicates hit or miss. Each of the plurality of symbols constituting the decorative symbol 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns, and these numbers, letters, and symbols are common to all symbols. It may be configured by adding a different pattern to each and integrating them. This pattern is a pattern on which a motif related to the theme of decoration or production set in the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is drawn, and may be, for example, a pattern on which a character of a person or an animal is drawn. The decorative symbol 61 is switched between the case where the symbol including the symbol is integrally displayed and the case where the symbols are separated and only the numbers, letters, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the development of the effect. It may be configured to be. In the background of the variable display of the decorative symbol 61, a moving image having a directing effect related to the decorative or staging theme set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the symbol variation.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display which is a high-definition dot matrix type display device, but the width of the display area may be about half the width of the game area, or a large size exceeding half. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the effect display device is formed with a passage width that allows one game ball to pass through, and if the player launches it with maximum strength as a so-called "right-handed", it will almost certainly be the right side passage. The game ball can be passed through, and it can be distinguished from the so-called "left-handed". The effect display device 60 is not limited to a single display device, but may be a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of a plurality of displays, displays of different sizes such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal may be combined, the sub liquid crystal may be arranged at a position adjacent to the main liquid crystal, or a position other than the game board, for example, a launch handle. It may be installed in the vicinity of (upper ball plate, right decorative lamp, etc.). When installed in the vicinity of the firing handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that can be operated and input by the player. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, a mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type, or a display means such as an LED matrix type. ..

The effect button 109 is an operation input means that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine according to the effect content, and the effect content or the like is changed according to the pressing mode. The effect button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the effect button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 are oriented substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be projected. The rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 function as the effect lever 112 in a state of projecting to the outside, and the player can hold the effect button 109 and pull the effect lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper ball plate 105.

The method of gaming and the flow of control performed in the gaming machine having the above configuration will be outlined. When the player rotates the launch handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 105 are guided one by one to the rail 82 and launched to the game area 81 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle. .. When the player fixes the rotation position of the launch handle 107 by hand, the launch of the game ball is repeated at regular time intervals. The game ball launched to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center decoration 64, etc., and falls in a direction corresponding to the way of hitting. When a game ball falls into each of the general winning openings 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the large winning opening 20, the winning ball according to the type of the winning opening is the upper ball plate 105 or the lower. It is paid out to the ball plate 106. The game ball that has fallen into each winning opening such as the general winning opening 33 is treated as a safe ball, and the game ball that has fallen into the out opening 34 is treated as an out ball. The specification may be such that the discharge of the safe ball is excluded from the detection by the out detection device 39, or the safe ball is also guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all the discharge is detected by the out detection device 39. May be. Alternatively, the specification may be such that the guide of the safe ball and the detection of the safe ball by the out detection device 39 are not performed, and the total of the number of detected balls of the safe ball added to the number of detected balls of the out ball is used as the number of ejected balls.

Further, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45, and is stopped and displayed after the variation display time determined prior to the display has elapsed. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode or the second hit mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded based on the hit mode of the stop-displayed symbol and the gaming state when the stop is displayed. .. That is, when the gaming state when the symbol is stopped is the normal gaming state and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. Further, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first hit mode in the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state), the normal symbol is in the second hit mode in the normal time and the specific game state (for example, the easy ball entry state). When the stop display is displayed, a long opening for 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long opening are set so as to differ depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol is a hit with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening in that case (the probability that the winning symbol of the first hit mode is selected) is 1 /. 3. The execution probability of long opening (probability of selecting the winning symbol of the second hitting mode) is set to 2/3. Further, in the open lottery in the specific gaming state (for example, the easy entry state), the normal symbol is hit with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability of the first hit mode and the second hit mode is the same as that of the normal game state. However, it is set so that the long opening is executed regardless of the winning mode. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, the function of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol (probability change from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (the opening time when the stop is displayed in the first hit mode is 0). The ease of entering the second starting port 12 is enhanced by (extending from 1 second to 6.0 seconds). The function of extending the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory 90 (long opening) may be referred to as "opening extension".

In addition, as described above, by setting the probability of long opening to be higher than the probability of short opening in the normal state, long opening is executed at a constant rate even in the normal state when the normal symbol is won. .. As a modification, on the contrary, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening, the specification may be the same for both, or the specification may be short opening without fail. good. Further, when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state, the easiness of entering the second starting port 12 may be enhanced by using three functions including a function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In that case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. The winning probability of the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the specification may be such that the normal electric accessory 90 can be expanded only when the open lottery is performed in the easy entry state. Further, when the normal electric accessory 90 expands, it may be notified in advance to that effect, or the hold of the normal symbol change may be pre-read and notified before the start of the change of the normal symbol, or the normal symbol may be notified. It may be notified during the fluctuation.

As a modification of the opening mode when the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is lengthened to about 6 seconds by repeating the opening for 2 seconds, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It may be an embodiment. Further, a plurality of combinations of the opening time and the number of opening times may be prepared and one of them may be selected. For example, when the 2-second opening is 3 times, the total opening time is the same as when the 6-second opening is 1 time, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modified example in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the former player enters the ball assuming that the player who notices the opening adjusts the hitting direction to the second starting port 12 from that point. It can be said that the chance is long. Further, it may be configured so that there are a plurality of hit types of ordinary symbols, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism may be different depending on the hit types. For example, when the normal symbol is the first hit, the 0.1 second opening is set once in the normal state, the 1 second opening is set three times in the easy entry state, and the second hit is the normal state. Then, the 6-second opening may be performed once, and the 2-second opening may be performed twice in the easy-to-enter state.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the first special symbol display unit 41, the second special symbol display unit 42, and the effect display device 60. , And the decorative symbol 61 are variablely displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the variation display time determined prior to the display has elapsed. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variablely displayed according to a variable pattern in which the variation mode from the start to the stop of the variation is defined. The decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed according to a variable effect pattern in which the variation mode from the start to the stop of the variation is defined. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns and fluctuation effect patterns are prepared, and each has various fluctuation times, long and short. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are varied and displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed according to the variation effect pattern having the same variation time. In the variation pattern, the variation display time is set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the variation of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 occurs when the variation display time elapses. It will be stopped. Hereinafter, the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 displayed according to the variation effect pattern will be illustrated, and the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. Details of the variation pattern and the method of determining the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

As an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol 61, first, when the variation starts, the symbols are varied in all three rows like the reel rotation of the slot machine, and when the variation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped one by one in the final stop mode. The symbol combination as is displayed. It should be noted that, as an operation when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 190 is stopped, it is possible to control so that a plurality of rows are stopped at the same time instead of one row at a time so that the effect display other than the decorative symbol is noticed during the variable display, or the effect display other than the decorative symbol may be noticed in a shorter fluctuation time. It may be possible to display the symbol variation. In addition, as an operation at the start of the change of the decorative symbol 190, it is controlled so as to delay the start of the change of some columns according to the subsequent development (type of effect pattern, etc.) in the change to produce a feeling of expectation. You may do it.

Next, the variable staging pattern will be briefly described. The variable effect pattern includes a normal out-of-reach effect pattern, a reach out-of-reach effect pattern, and a reach jackpot effect pattern. The normal out-of-order effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying a normal out-of-design pattern combination. The out-of-reach effect pattern is an effect pattern when displaying a combination of out-of-reach symbols through a reach state, which is a state in which one more symbol is aligned and a big hit is made. The reach jackpot effect pattern is an effect pattern when the symbol combination of the jackpot is displayed after the reach state. In particular, the pattern when going through the reach state includes a pattern having various long and short fluctuation times, a reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called "super reach". ". The normal out-of-reach effect pattern, the reach out-of-reach effect pattern, and the reach jackpot effect pattern have a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in a time-saving state, respectively. However, even in the normal state, if the second symbol changes corresponding to the entry into the second starting port 12, the probability that the jackpot will be accompanied by a probability change or the probability that the number of unit games of the special game will increase is the first. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first fluctuation corresponding to the entry into the 1 starting port 11, a pattern for chance effect indicating that the chance is a relatively advantageous jackpot may be used. In the embodiment, the time saving pattern is used in the time saving state, but since the time saving is accompanied in the probabilistic change state, the time saving pattern is also used in the probabilistic changing state. However, in the modified example, the specification may be such that a pattern for probabilistic change different from that for time saving is used in the probable change state. Alternatively, a specification may be made in which a common pattern is used for the time saving and the probabilistic change, or a specification in which the probabilistic change pattern is used in the probable change state without using the time saving pattern in particular.

When the number of hold of the winning / failing lottery reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol fluctuation time in the case of a loss is shortened than usual in order to improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "shortening fluctuation"). Similarly, when the number of pending win / fail lottery is 4, the symbol fluctuation time in the case of a miss is further shortened as compared with the case of the above 3 in order to further improve the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "super shortened fluctuation"). ). When the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in the stop mode showing a big hit after the above-mentioned symbol variation, it is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is started. The stop mode of the decorative symbol 61 showing a big hit is, for example, a combination mode in which three types of symbols match.

There are two types of special games, normal special games and shortened special games, and there is a big difference in the profits of the winning prize balls. Normally, the special game is started by displaying the effect screen called the start demo time. After the screen display of the start demo time, the big winning opening 20 is opened, and the opening is continued for about 30 seconds, or is temporarily closed after 9 or more game balls have fallen. The process from opening to closing of the large winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but there may be a case where a plurality of short-time openings are repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the large winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 times or 10 times, the special game is usually ended by the display of the effect screen called the end demo time. In normal special games, you can expect enough balls to enter 9 or more balls per unit game, and you can get enough prize balls (this is also called "ball out") by 10 times of unit games, which is a big profit. Is obtained. A special game in which 10 unit games are repeated is appropriately referred to as a "10R jackpot", and a special game in which 4 unit games are repeated is appropriately referred to as a "4R jackpot". Although the unit game is repeated 10 times, the unit game is substantially repeated a small number of times by opening the large winning opening 20 for a shorter time (for example, 1.6 seconds) than usual in some unit games. It is also possible to realize a normal special game (sometimes referred to as a "substantial nR jackpot") similar to that of the one.

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demo time and the end demo time are short or almost nonexistent (0.1 seconds, etc.), and the large winning opening 20 is opened for 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice to end the shortened special game. In the shortened special game, since the opening of the large winning opening 20 is only repeated twice for a very short time, it is almost impossible to enter the large winning opening 20, and the number of balls is substantially zero or a small number (for example, number). This is a special game that is equal to the number of payouts depending on the number of balls entered in one round, such as balls to several tens of balls. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also appropriately referred to as a "2R jackpot". Although the number of unit games is the same as that of the normal special game, the shortened special game can be realized by opening the large winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all the unit games.

Further, when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in the predetermined small hit mode after the above-mentioned symbol variation, the small hit game composed of one unit game. And the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 20 is executed. In one unit game constituting the small hit game, the big winning opening 20 is opened only for about 1.6 seconds, and the operation mode is similar to the 2R big hit in appearance.

When a special game occurs and the hit stop symbol at that time is in a specific mode (for example, "777"), the probability change, which is one of the specific games, is further started after the end of the special game. During the probability change, a winning / failing lottery with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game may occur relatively early. It should be noted that it may not be clearly indicated from the appearance that the determination result of the winning / failing lottery is a specific jackpot, that is, a jackpot accompanied by a probability change, and a latent probability change state may be set in which the decorative design or the content of the effect is not explicitly notified. In that case, the staging display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether the change is probable or non-probable even during the probable change. In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, whether it is a probable change or a non-probable change may be clearly indicated on the effect display device 60.

In the normal game after the special game is completed, the easy entry state, which is one of the specific game states, is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the winning probability of the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the opening extension is executed so that the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is extended. Since the number of hits of the normal symbol per fixed time can be increased and the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 12 is also increased, it is highly possible that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12, it becomes possible to continue playing while hardly reducing the number of balls held or gradually increasing the number of balls held.

In the easy-to-enter state, as one of the specific gaming states, the so-called time reduction in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shorter than in the normal state is further executed. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after a predetermined number of fluctuations, for example, 100 fluctuations are displayed, but reaches the fluctuation number. If a big hit occurs before, the time reduction will end once. Since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened in a short time, until a big hit occurs as compared with the case where the symbol changes with the normal fluctuation time. It is possible to shorten the time of the game and relatively increase the ease of obtaining a big hit. In the modified example, the specification may be such that the special symbol is not shortened in the easy-to-enter state.

FIG. 2 shows a basic structure on the back side of a pachinko gaming machine. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and processes all game operations such as a lottery when winning a prize in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151, controls the display content of the effect display device 60, and changes the display content of the effect according to the determination result of the main board 200 in particular. The back set mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball plate 105 according to the winning of each winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The launching device 156 launches the stored balls of the upper ball plate 105 into the game area 81 one by one. The launch control board 157 controls the launch operation of the launch device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies electric power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200. The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number for the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the total of safe balls and out balls.

A setting changing device 170 is provided on the board of the main board 200. The setting change device 170 is a device for changing a setting to one of a plurality of settings (also referred to as a game setting) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six levels of settings (settings 1 to 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of a big hit can be different depending on the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value from setting 1 to setting 6, the more advantageous the game specification can be made for the player. When each of the jackpot probabilities from setting 1 to setting 6 is M1 to M6, M1 ≤ M2 ≤ M3. The jackpot probability of each setting can be determined so that ≦ M4 ≦ M5 ≦ M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 has a setting key cylinder 171 for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game store, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a set setting value. It includes a setting display unit 173 for lighting and displaying, and a setting memory for storing the set setting value. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey type switch for shifting to a state in which the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") or a state in which the setting can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 and the setting key is turned to turn it on, and then the power switch 150 is turned on to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In order to shift to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, in order to shift to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the state shifts to the setting change state, the number "1" indicating the setting 1 is displayed on the setting display unit 173 as the initial value of the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display unit 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is changed in order such as 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → .... When the setting key inserted in the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the off state after changing the setting, the setting value displayed in the setting display unit 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory and the setting change is confirmed. , It will be in a playable state. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is not switched and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted in the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off, the game becomes playable. When the setting key is turned off to enable the game, the setting display unit 173 is turned off and the current set value cannot be visually recognized.

The setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key off state), RAM clear is executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key is on), the setting change state is entered when the RAM is cleared. If the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key-off state, the power is restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key on state, the setting confirmation state is entered. Further, the setting display unit 173 may also be used as the performance display unit 159. In this case, the combined display unit may function as the performance display unit 159 in the game-enabled state, and may function as the setting display unit 173 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the setting changing device 170 may not be provided so that the game setting cannot be changed.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows a functional block of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, the functions realized by using each configuration will be described, but in the present specification, in order to match the physical configuration and the functional configuration, for example, a physical configuration such as a main board 200, a payout control board 155, a launch control board 157, etc. For convenience, the term may be used as it is for the part already explained as.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a power supply board 158 that generates a power source to be used in the gaming machine based on an AC power supply (AC24V or the like) supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. Main board 200, a payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling the payout of prize balls, a launch control board 157 for controlling the launch of the game ball to the game area, and a directing operation and processing are controlled. The function is shared with the sub-board 300 as a sub-control device.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a large winning opening 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning opening group (first general winning opening 33a, second general winning opening). It is electrically connected to the port 33b), the out port 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and various control signals are transmitted and received to and from each of them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a prize ball payout transmitted from the main board 200, a signal indicating the control state of the main board 200, and the like, and indirectly causes the launch control board 157. And also controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball feed device 164, and the ball feed device 164 and the launch device 164 and the launch device are based on the launch permission signal transmitted from the payout control board 155. The device 156 is controlled to launch a game ball. The sub-board 300 includes an effect display device 60, a movable accessory 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), a speaker 108, an effect input operation device 115 (effect button 109, cross key 110), a decorative lamp 111, and electrical. It is connected to and sends and receives various control signals to and from each.

Data transmission / reception between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is one-way from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. It is arranged on the sub-board 300. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub board 300 to the configuration included in the main board 200, and the data transmission is performed. I can't even request it. Therefore, the sub-board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Further, data is transmitted / received bidirectionally between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155, and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157. However, as in the case between the main board 200 and the sub board 300, the configuration is such that data is transmitted and received from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155 in one direction, and the data is transmitted and received from the payout control board 155 to the launch control board 157 in one direction. It may be configured to send and receive data.

The functional blocks included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the launch control board 157, and the sub board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modification, some functional blocks may be used on other boards. It may be installed. For example, the functional block included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the sub board 300, or the functional block included in the launch control board 157 may be mounted on the payout control board 155. good. Further, for example, a part of the functional block included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the main board 200, or the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155, which is a part of the functional block. May be divided into a plurality of substrates to form one functional block as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary determination means 235, a general drawing lottery means 213, a hold control means 240, and a main board. Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small hit game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening / closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power interruption processing execution means 282, It includes a main error detecting means 284, a setting changing means 286, a setting confirming means 287, and a command communication means 205.

<Entering ball determination means 201>
The ball entry determination means 201 determines the entry of a game ball into each winning opening. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives the first start winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the first start opening 11, and when it receives the second start winning information, the game ball has won the second start opening 12. to decide. When the winning ball determination means 201 receives the large winning opening winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the large winning opening 20, and when it receives the general winning information, it determines that the game ball has won the general winning opening 33. Upon receiving the passing information, the ball entry determining means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. Upon receiving the discharge information, the ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34. The ball entry determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of launch balls, which is the total of safe balls and out balls, and displays it on the performance display unit 159. The ball entry determination means 201 has a "number of payout balls" ÷ "number of out balls" x 100 when the probability of a big hit is a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state (so-called low probability and low entry ball). The value of is displayed on the performance display unit 159. Therefore, the performance display unit 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various determinations in the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the general drawing lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 ranges from "0" to "65535" as random numbers (also referred to as "win / fail lottery values") used in the win / fail lottery by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222. A random number in the range is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 is "0" to "255" as random numbers (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in the symbol determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. Random numbers in the range up to are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 has "0" to "255" as random numbers (also referred to as "variation pattern determination lottery value") used in the determination of the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Random numbers in the range up to "" are generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "99" as a random number used in the winning / failing lottery by the normal figure lottery means 213 by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "2" as a random number used when determining a normal symbol by a predetermined means. The "random numbers" here are not only physical random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit and genuine random numbers in the mathematical sense, but also pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter and software random numbers using a random number generation algorithm. But it may be. Alternatively, it may be a random number generated by combining a hardware random number and a software random number. Further, as the random numbers acquired by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212, the random numbers generated by the same generation means may be acquired, or the random numbers generated by another generation means may be acquired. ..

<Public map lottery means 213>
When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol lottery means 213 generates random numbers of a random number used for winning or losing lottery of the normal symbol and a random number used for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol. Obtain from 202 and execute the lottery. The ordinary symbol lottery means 213 has a normal symbol winning / failing determination table (not shown) referred to for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct, and a normal symbol determination to be referred to for determining a stop symbol of the ordinary symbol to be displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 45. Hold the table. The normal symbol winning / failing judgment table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for winning / failing and the winning, and the normal symbol judgment table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for determining the stopped symbol and the normal symbol. Whether the normal symbol is correct or not and the stop symbol are determined based on the hit probability and the symbol selection probability. When the lottery value for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol corresponds to the hit, the ordinary symbol lottery means 213 determines the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol by referring to the ordinary symbol determination table, and the lottery value for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol is set. When it corresponds to the deviation, the aspect of the deviation symbol of 1 is always determined. When the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol corresponds to a hit and the normal symbol stops at a predetermined symbol (first hit mode or second hit mode), the opening / closing control means 275, which will be described later, changes the mode of the stop symbol and the gaming state. The ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds at the time of short opening and 6 seconds at the time of long opening. The lottery value of the ordinary symbol is temporarily held by the hold control means 240 described later. However, the lottery value is held only when the predetermined holding upper limit number held by the holding control means 240 is not exceeded.

<1st lottery means 211 and 2nd lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 has a function of executing a first lottery related to the first game, such as a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first hit / miss determination means 221 and a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination. The first winning / failing lottery is executed as a winning / failing lottery corresponding to the entry of the ball into the first starting port 11, including the means 231. Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 makes a variable display of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second hit / fail determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to entry into the second starting port 12. The second winning / failing lottery is executed as a winning / failing lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 makes a variable display of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<1st lottery value acquisition means 216 and 2nd lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various lottery and determination by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first starting port 11. Specifically, the first winning / failing lottery value for winning / failing determination by the first winning / failing determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determining means 226, and the first variation pattern. The first pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determination means 231 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires random numbers for various lottery and determination by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the second starting port 12. Specifically, the second winning / failing lottery value for winning / failing determination by the second winning / failing determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determining means 227, and the second variation pattern. The second pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determination means 232 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means.

The first winning / failing determination means 221 executes a winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to shift to the special game based on the first winning / failing lottery value. The second winning / failing determination means 222 executes a winning / failing determination for determining whether or not to shift to the special game based on the second winning / failing lottery value. In the hit / fail judgment, more specifically, "big hit" indicating that the game shifts to the special game, "small hit" indicating the shift to the small hit game, and "not shifting to the special game and the small hit game". It is determined whether it corresponds to "off". The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 hold a hit / miss determination table referred to in the hit / fail determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the hit / fail judgment executed at the start of the symbol variation from the preliminary hit / fail judgment described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "hit / fail judgment as the main judgment". In the present specification, when the term "table" or "selection criterion" is used, the correspondence between the first parameter such as a lottery value and the second parameter such as a value indicating an option is strictly defined by a table structure. In addition to pointing to data, it is also broadly included to be realized by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter as such a correspondence. Including them, the concept is substantially synonymous with "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria". Further, when a table structure is used, the selection criteria that are substantially one type may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables, but when the term "multiple types of selection criteria" is used, the subdivisions may be used. Shows the actual number of types of tables, not the number of converted tables.

The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 hold a table corresponding to each hit / fail determination as a hit / fail determination table to be referred to in the hit / fail determination. Specifically, a hit / fail judgment table for hit / fail judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means 221 (also referred to as “first hit / miss judgment table”) and a hit / fail judgment table for hit / fail judgment by the second hit / miss judgment means 222 (“second hit / miss judgment table”). The table to be referred to is selected according to the pass / fail judgment to be executed while holding the "hit / fail judgment table"). In the plurality of winning / failing determination tables, the determination results of big hit, small hit, and miss are associated with the winning / failing lottery value, and the winning / failing probability is determined according to the range setting of the associated big hit. In addition, a plurality of types of win / fail judgment tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings are prepared. For example, for each of the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6, the win / fail judgment table in which the correspondence between the win / fail lottery value and the win / fail judgment result is different. Is prepared. If the probabilities of big hit, small hit, and miss are the same among the plurality of game settings, a win / fail determination table common to the plurality of game settings may be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a hit / fail determination table. This figure shows a winning / failing determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a winning / failing determination table corresponding to the setting 6. In the hit / fail judgment table of this figure, the judgment result of big hit, small hit, and miss is associated with the win / miss lottery value, and the big hit / small hit probability and the small hit / miss probability according to each associated range setting. Is decided. The first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 refer to the hit / fail determination table of the present figure in the hit / fail determination as the present determination. In both the first winning / failing lottery by the first winning / failing determination means 221 and the second winning / failing lottery by the second winning / failing determination means 222, a big hit is normally obtained only when the winning / failing lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. At the time of probability change, the range of big hits is expanded, and it becomes a big hit not only when the winning / failing lottery value corresponds to the range of 0 to 299 but also when it corresponds to the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range corresponding to the jackpot changes according to the gaming state. In this figure, a single hit / fail judgment table shows the jackpot range in both normal time and probability change time, but the hit / fail judgment table may be prepared separately for normal time and probability change time. It may be prepared separately for one winning / failing lottery and for the second winning / failing lottery.

In this embodiment, even if the winning / failing lottery value does not fall within the large hit range, it will be a small hit if it falls within the predetermined range. In the example of this figure, when the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the first winning / failing determination means 221 corresponds to the range of 56500 to 65535, a small hit is obtained, and the winning / failing lottery value acquired by the second winning / failing determination means 222 is 64000 to 65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the range corresponding to the small hit is wider in the first win / fail lottery than in the second win / fail lottery, and the small hit is likely to occur. In this way, if it does not correspond to a big hit, it is originally all "off", but in the example of this figure, if it does not correspond to a big hit but also does not correspond to a small hit, the winning / losing lottery value range Is particularly expressed as "off". That is, when "hit or miss" is considered from the viewpoint of "whether or not it is a big hit", "small hit" may be included in the broad sense of "missing" in the sense of "not a big hit". In addition, when "hit or not" is considered from the viewpoint of "hit or not", "small hit" may be included in "hit" in a broad sense together with "big hit". In this figure, an example is shown in which the judgment table for whether or not it is a big hit and the judgment table for whether or not it is a small hit are realized in the form of a single hit / fail judgment table, but even if each is realized as a separate table. good. Further, the "small hit" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in any of the games. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding hit / fail determination table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the winning / failing lottery value for each set value. FIG. 3A shows the correspondence between the first winning / failing lottery value acquired by the first winning / failing determination means 221 and the winning / failing determination result. FIG. 3B shows the correspondence between the second hit / miss lottery value acquired by the second hit / miss determination means 222 and the hit / fail determination result. The range of the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value, which are big hits during normal times and probability changes, is 0 to 294 if the set value is "1", 0 to 295 if the set value is "2", and the set value "2". If it is "3", it is 0 to 296, if it is a set value "4", it is 0 to 297, if it is a set value "5", it is 0 to 298, and if it is a set value "6", it is 0 to 299. Therefore, as the set value becomes larger, the range of the winning / failing lottery value that becomes a big hit in the normal time increases, and the probability of becoming a big hit in the normal time increases. Further, the range of the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value, which are big hits only at the time of probability change (that is, out of the normal case), should be 295 to 2949 if the set value is "1" and the set value "2". If 296 to 2959, if the set value is "3", 297 to 2769, if the set value is "4", 298 to 2979, if the set value is "5", 299 to 2899, and if the set value is "6", then It is 300 to 2999. Therefore, as the set value becomes larger, the range of the winning / failing lottery value that becomes a big hit at the time of probability change also increases, and the probability of becoming a big hit at the time of probability change also increases. The range of the winning / failing lottery value is determined so that the ratio between the normal jackpot probability, which is a jackpot during normal times, and the jackpot probability, which is a jackpot during probability changes, is constant regardless of the set value. In this figure, the range of the winning / failing lottery value is defined so that the probability of the jackpot at the time of probability change is 10 times the probability of the jackpot at the normal time, and it is common to all the set values "1" to "6". .. In addition, the range of the winning / failing lottery value is determined so that the probability of a small hit is constant regardless of the set value. In all the set values "1" to "6", a small hit is obtained when the range of the first winning / failing lottery value corresponds to 56500 to 65535, and a small hit is made when the range of the second winning / failing lottery value corresponds to 64000 to 65535. It will be a hit. The range of winning / failing lottery values outside the range of big hits or small hits is "out of order". In this figure, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the correspondence between the winning / failing lottery value and the winning / failing determination result may be determined so that the jackpot probability is the same between the different set values.

<1st symbol determining means 226 and 2nd symbol determining means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stopped symbol at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol based on the symbol lottery value acquired from the random number generation means 202 and the result of the winning / failing determination. .. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determining means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the hit / fail determination by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second symbol determination means 227 is a hit / miss by the second hit / miss determination means 222. Holds a plurality of symbol judgment tables according to the judgment result. The first hit / fail determination means 221 holds a first symbol determination table at the time of a big hit referred to at the time of a big hit, a first symbol determination table at the time of a small hit referred to at the time of a small hit, and a first symbol determination table at the time of a loss referred to at the time of a miss. The second hit / miss determination means 222 holds a second symbol determination table at the time of a big hit, a second symbol determination table at the time of a small hit, and a second symbol determination table at the time of a miss, which is referred to at the time of a small hit. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 select a symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation from the prior symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "design determination as the main determination".

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7A is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, FIG. 7B is a table to be referred to when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, and FIG. 7C is a table to be referred to. It is a table to be referred when the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of the present figure in the symbol determination as the present determination. In each symbol determination table, the correspondence between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value is defined. The types of special symbols are associated with the hit / miss judgment results of big hit, small hit, and miss, respectively. "0" to "4" correspond to the big hit, and "5" to "9" correspond to the small hit. "10" corresponds to the disconnection. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by a combination of segments.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the types "0" to "4" of the special symbols are associated with the presence or absence of the big hit and the probability fluctuation after the big hit. Specifically, the type "0" indicates a 10R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, is associated with "0 to 99" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and is "0 to 99" in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144 ”. The type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "substantially 4R hit") with a probability change as a specific jackpot, is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the second symbol lottery value. It is associated with "145 to 149". The type "2" indicates a 2R jackpot accompanied by a probability change, and the type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "3" indicates a 10R jackpot that is not accompanied by a probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "3" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "150 to 189". The type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot that is not accompanied by a probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each type of jackpot (that is, the content of the jackpot and the presence or absence of subsequent probability fluctuations) is determined by the size of the range of the symbol lottery value.

In addition, it is possible to provide more types of special symbols, and in that case, by configuring so that one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of special symbol types, the jackpot can be increased while increasing the symbol types. You can set fewer types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide into more types of jackpots in correspondence with the increased number of symbol types. Further, it is possible to provide different symbol types at the time of the first lottery and at the time of the second lottery. In this case, one jackpot type is configured to correspond to each of the type of special symbol selected at the time of the first lottery and the type of special symbol selected at the time of the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set so that the ratio of probability fluctuation is the same in the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7 (b), the type "10" is associated with the symbol lottery value in the entire range when the hit / fail determination result is wrong. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol will always be stopped and displayed in the case of deviation. It is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols to be stopped and displayed in the case of disengagement.

As shown in FIG. 7 (c), the types "5" to "9" of the special symbols are associated with the small hits. The type "5" is associated with the range "0 to 49" of the symbol lottery value, and the type "6" is associated with the range "50 to 99" of the symbol lottery value. The type "7" is associated with the range "100 to 149" of the symbol lottery value, the type "8" is associated with the range "150 to 199" of the symbol lottery value, and the type "9" is the range of the symbol lottery value. It is associated with "200 to 255".

In this embodiment, in order to save the storage area in the main board 200, the table of FIG. 7 is also referred to as the pre-symbol determination table in the pre-symbol determination. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine that the value of "0" to "10" indicating the type of the special symbol as a result of the preliminary symbol determination is the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery. It is transmitted to the staging determination means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of holds. In addition, as a preliminary symbol determination table, a table that can be further subdivided to enable complicated determination, or a table in which the determination range of the jackpot symbol for executing the same special game is summarized and simplified may be used. .. In addition, when the symbol is uniformly determined at the time of disengagement as in this embodiment, a specific symbol can be selected without referring to the acquired symbol lottery value and without preparing a symbol determination table for disengagement. You may decide.

<First variation pattern determining means 231 and second variation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determining means 231 acquires, from the random number generation means 202, a variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is defined. It is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determining means 232 uses the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined as the second pattern lottery value acquired from the random number generation means 202. Determine from multiple variation patterns based on. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 respectively refer to the variation pattern table when starting the symbol variation to determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation. Further, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 execute a preliminary pattern determination as to which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The control means of the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 and the main board 200 refer to the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied, and the start port. Hold or share the pre-pattern judgment table used to generate information for the execution judgment of the look-ahead process at the time of entering the ball. The fluctuation pattern defines the fluctuation time from the start to the stop of the fluctuation when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and has various long and short fluctuation times depending on the type. That is, in each fluctuation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is defined, the variation display time is substantially set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the special symbol is set when the variation display time elapses. Fluctuation is stopped. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern determination executed at the start of the symbol variation is also appropriately referred to as "variation pattern determination as the main determination" in order to distinguish it from the prior pattern determination. Further, in order to contribute to the selection of the variation effect pattern of the decorative pattern described later, it may be defined as a different type of variation pattern even though the variation time is the same.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 refer to the table of the present figure (a) in the normal state, and refer to the table of the present figure (b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "0", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, select "normal 1", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "2", and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, select "normal", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "3". 2 ”is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, select "out of reach" of the pattern range number "4". As "out of reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holdings. When the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the fluctuation pattern is 10 seconds, and when the number of holdings is 3, the fluctuation pattern is 7 seconds and the number of holdings. When is 4, a 4-second fluctuation pattern is selected.

In this figure, an example of mainly classifying into five types according to the fluctuation time will be described, but a plurality of fluctuation effect patterns are prepared for each of these variation patterns in the sub-board 300, and dozens of types of variation effect patterns are prepared in total. Is equivalent to being associated with the lottery value range of each category.

The range of pattern lottery values assigned to "normal 1", "normal 2", and "out of reach" also differs depending on the number of reservations. When the number of holdings is 0 or 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of holdings increases, the lottery value range of "normal 1" and "normal 2" becomes narrower, and the lottery value of "out of reach" The range becomes wider. The smaller the number of holds, the wider the lottery value range of the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time, and the probability that the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time will be selected increases. Therefore, the smaller the number of holds, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of holds, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a fluctuation pattern table in which the correspondence between the pattern lottery value range and the fluctuation pattern is different for each number of holdings, it is possible to realize control in which a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is easily selected when the number of holdings is small.

If the winning / failing judgment result is a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "5", is selected and the pattern lottery value is set. If it is 124 to 248, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "6", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, select "normal 1", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "7", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, select "normal", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "8". 2 ”is selected.

If the winning / failing judgment result is a 2R big hit or a small hit in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, "Super 3", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "9", is selected and the pattern lottery value is set. If it is 123 to 255, "normal 3", which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10", is selected.

When the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 transmit the pre-determination result to the staging determination means 303 as a so-called look-ahead result, the value (0 to 10) of the pattern range number is set to the first correctness. It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is a lottery or a second winning / failing lottery and the number of holds. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, it is illustrated that a table is provided for each of the winning / failing determination results in the preliminary pattern determination. In addition to deriving only information regarding which range it is located in, the control means side of the sub-board 300 may be controlled to determine what kind of variation is to be executed together with the preliminary pass / fail determination result.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8B referred to in the time saving state, the pattern lottery value is assigned to the variation pattern for time saving. However, the correspondence between the range of the pattern lottery value and the fluctuation time is the same as that of FIG. “Reachless loss shortening” is a variation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as “reachless loss” in FIG. 8 (a). For "shortening without reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of holdings, a fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds when the number of holdings is 0, 1 and a fluctuation pattern of 1 second when the number of holdings is 2 to 4. Are selected respectively. The first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables depending on the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed in preference to the first lottery, the second lottery is easy to enter despite the time saving. The situation in which the hold of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the deviation variation in the first lottery in the easy entry state, a variation pattern table is referred to in which a variation pattern for a long time (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the variation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of holdings. It may be that.

<Hold control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the hold control means 240 includes the special figure hold means 241 and the normal figure hold means 242. When the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value is newly acquired, the special figure holding means 241 changes the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value acquired before that. When is displayed, the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the newly acquired first win / fail lottery value or the second win / fail lottery value is suspended, and the winning / failing lottery value is stored until the start of the variation display of the corresponding symbol. Here, for each of the first special symbols, the first winning / failing lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored up to a maximum of four, and for the second special symbol, each of them has an upper limit of four. The second winning / failing lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, and the second pattern lottery value are stored. The normal figure holding means 242 stores the normal figure lottery value acquired by the normal figure lottery means 213 as a holding ball. These holding numbers are represented by the number of lights or the number of blinks of the first special figure holding display unit 71, the second special figure holding display unit 72, and the normal figure holding display unit 75, respectively. The number of holds by the special figure hold means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60.

The lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery held by the special figure holding means 241 is preferentially digested over the lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery, and the symbol variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the big hit lottery value is reserved as the first winning / failing lottery, as long as the lottery value is reserved as the second winning / failing lottery, the symbol change corresponding to the big hit lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if there is a jackpot hold as the first win / fail lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of consecutive jackpots can be obtained by continuing to hit until the jackpot hold is entered as the second win / fail lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251, a second special figure control means 252, and a normal figure control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 according to the variation pattern determined according to the determination result of the first winning / failing lottery by the first lottery means 211. Let me. The first special symbol control means 251 sets as a new symbol variation start condition that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery performed before that has been completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to the variation pattern determined according to the determination result of the second winning / failing lottery by the second lottery means 212. Let me. The second special symbol control means 252 also has a new symbol variation start condition that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery performed before that has been completed.

When the special figure holding means 241 stores the winning / failing lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery, the first special figure controlling means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery. On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing lottery regardless of whether or not the winning / failing lottery value of the first winning / failing lottery is stored by the special figure holding means 241. As a result, when the lottery value is reserved in both the first winning / failing lottery and the second winning / failing lottery, the lottery value held in the second winning / failing lottery is preferentially read out and the symbol variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / failing lottery is not read and the symbol change does not start until the number of holdings in the second winning / failing lottery becomes 0.

The first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 are varied by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing of starting and the timing of stopping the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the staging determination means 303 (sub-main). When the variation start command is transmitted, a value indicating each of the winning / failing determination result, the stop symbol, and the variation pattern determined or determined as the final determination and a value indicating whether it is the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery are set. It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When the variable stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variable stop command. Further, the effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a variation stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variation display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the staging control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized, and the interlocking is maintained. The normal symbol control means 254 causes the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the normal map lottery means 213 as a variation display of the normal symbol.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the other while the variable display of one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is performed. The special figure adjusting means 276 has a second special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball has entered the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. The variation display of 52 is prioritized over the variation display of the first special symbol 51 based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 11. For example, when both the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value are reserved, the second winning / failing lottery value is always preferentially digested, and the second special symbol 52 is continuously varied and displayed.

The special symbol adjusting means 276 in the modified example displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the variation of the second special symbol 52 according to the order of entering the balls into the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. It may be selectively varied and displayed. For example, when the ball enters in the order of the first starting port 11, the first starting port 11, and the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable order. Will be done. In this case, the special figure adjusting means 276 monitors the holding control means 240 and stores the holding order of the winning / failing lottery value. Since which special symbol should be changed is determined according to the entry order of the game balls, that is, the hold order of the winning / failing lottery value in the hold control means 240, the player can easily visually grasp the order of change.

In another modification, the special symbol adjusting means 276 may display the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the ball entry order. good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first winning / failing lottery value and the second winning / failing lottery value are reserved, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are alternately displayed in a variable manner. Since which special symbol should be changed simply alternates regardless of the order in which the game balls enter, it is easy for the player to intuitively grasp the order of change.

When one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a hitting manner, the special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variation display of the other. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbol is not started while the special game is executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The pre-determination means 235 includes a first lottery pre-determination means 236 and a second lottery pre-determination means 237. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 is a random number acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 before the execution of various determinations by the first winning / failing determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first variation pattern determination means 231. Is used to determine in advance information about the change of the first special symbol before the start of the change of the first special symbol by the first special figure control means 251. The second lottery pre-determination means 237 is a random number acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before the execution of various determinations by the second winning / failing determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232. Is used to determine in advance information about the change of the second special symbol before the start of the change of the second special symbol by the second special figure control means 252.

The first lottery pre-determination means 236 includes a first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table, a first pre-design lottery value determination table, and a first pre-variation pattern random value determination table as determination tables for pre-determination related to the first lottery means 211. Hold the table. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table to determine a random number group to which the first win / fail lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-symbol lottery value determination table to determine a random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 uses the first pre-variation pattern determination table to determine a random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure holding means 241 belongs. Then, these determination results are temporarily stored as the pre-determination results, and the information regarding the pre-determination results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a preliminary hit / fail determination table referred to in the preliminary hit / fail determination. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the first game) refers to the first pre-win / fail lottery value determination table of FIG. 9A when the ball enters the first start opening 11, and the win / fail lottery value. When is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating to that effect is set as a preliminary hit / fail determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value of "2" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "3000 to 56499", the value of "3" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "56500 to 65535", the value of "4" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. Next, the first symbol lottery value determination table (not shown) is referred to, and if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating that effect is set as the advance symbol determination result. .. When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating to that effect is set as a preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", the value of "2" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", the value of "3" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to the first pre-variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. .. When the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating to that effect is set as the pre-pattern determination result. When the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating to that effect is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the first lottery pre-determination means 236 (preliminary hit / fail determination regarding the first game) is the first start port 11 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. Information indicating that the ball has entered the ball (indicating that it is the first winning / failing lottery), information indicating the number of holds, and the like are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 according to the transmission timing.

The second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win / fail determination regarding the second game) refers to the second pre-win / fail lottery value determination table of FIG. 9B when the ball enters the second start opening 12, and the win / fail lottery. When the value is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary hit / fail determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value of "2" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "3000 to 63999", the value of "3" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. When the winning / failing lottery value is "64000 to 65535", the value of "4" indicating that fact is set as the preliminary winning / failing determination result. Next, with reference to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", a value of "0" indicating that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. .. When the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", the value of "1" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", the value of "2" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", the value of "3" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating to that effect is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Further, referring to the second pre-variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that fact is set as the pre-pattern determination result. .. When the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value of "B" indicating to that effect is set as the pre-pattern determination result. When the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating to that effect is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the second lottery pre-determination means 237 (preliminary hit / fail determination regarding the second game) is the second start port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 according to the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry into the ball (indicating that it is the second winning / failing lottery), the information indicating the number of holds, and the like.

The various information temporarily stored as the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 is stored in the predetermined pre-determination result storage area up to 4 each, as in the case of the reserved storage number. The preliminary determination result may be stored using the hold storage area stored by the hold control means 240. The information may be deleted based on the fact that the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 is transmitted to the staging determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. In this way, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected by sharing the information with other areas or erasing the information based on the completion of transmission. Further, as the judgment table for the preliminary judgment, the judgment table for the main judgment may be used without providing the table dedicated to the preliminary judgment, and the preliminary judgment regarding the first game and the preliminary judgment regarding the second game may be used. A part or all of them may share a common prejudgment table. In this way, by sharing it with other determination tables, it can be expected that the data capacity of the main board 200 will be reduced. The content to be transmitted as the determination result of the pre-determination means 235 can be appropriately selected, for example, only the determination result of whether or not the result is transmitted. Further, the value of the random number acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the above-mentioned command communication means 205 without being determined by the pre-determination means 235, and the sub-board. It may be configured to judge the content of the preliminary judgment by 300.

The pre-determining means 235 may refer to a pre-winning lottery value determination table in which the correspondence between the winning / failing lottery value and the prior winning / failing determination result is different according to the set value set by the setting changing device 170. Similar to the above-mentioned winning / failing determination table, a plurality of types of advance winning / failing lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the prior winning / failing lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched according to the set value of the game setting. In addition, a pre-win / fail lottery value determination table that can be commonly used among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the winning / failing may be preliminarily determined by the combination of the set value of the game setting and the value of the pre-winning / failing determination result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a preliminary hit / fail determination table corresponding to the game setting. FIG. 3A is a pre-hit / fail determination table referred to by the first lottery pre-determination means 236, and FIG. 3B is a pre-hit / fail determination table referred to by the second lottery pre-determination means 237. When the winning / failing lottery value is "0 to 294", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "11", indicating that a big hit is obtained in all the settings 1 to 6. When the winning / failing lottery value is "295", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "12", indicating that the setting is 2 or more in the normal state or all the settings at the time of probability change are big hits. When the winning / failing lottery value is "296", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "13", indicating that a big hit is obtained with the setting 3 or more at the normal time or all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "297", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "14", which indicates that the setting is 4 or more in the normal state or all the settings at the time of probability change are big hits. When the winning / failing lottery value is "298", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "15", indicating that the setting is 5 or more in the normal state or all the settings at the time of probability change are big hits. When the winning / failing lottery value is "299", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "16", indicating that a big hit is obtained with the setting 6 at the normal time or all the settings at the time of probability change. Further, when the winning / failing lottery value is "300 to 2949", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "21", indicating that a big hit is obtained in all the settings at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "22", indicating that a big hit is obtained at the setting 2 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "23", indicating that a big hit is obtained at the setting 3 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "23", indicating that a big hit is obtained at the setting of 4 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2980 to 2899", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "25", indicating that a big hit is obtained at the setting of 5 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning / failing lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is "26", indicating that the setting 6 at the time of probability change is a big hit. Further, when the first winning / failing lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499" and the second winning / failing lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is ". 30 ”, indicating that it is a small hit in all settings. Further, when the first winning / failing lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535" and the second winning / failing lottery value shown in (b) is "644000 to 65535", the preliminary winning / failing determination result is ". 40 ”, indicating that all settings are out of order. By using such a preliminary hit / fail determination table, it is possible to show an appropriate preliminary hit / fail determination result for each set value of the game setting.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 operates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first winning / failing lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in the transition to the special game. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20. Similarly, when the special game control means 260 results in the second winning / failing lottery by the second lottery means 212 indicating a shift to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. It is determined that the special game operating condition is satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20.

The special game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is continuously performed a plurality of times, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special game includes a 10R jackpot that repeats a unit game 10 times, a 4R jackpot that repeats a unit game four times, and a 2R jackpot that repeats a unit game with a shorter opening time than the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot only twice. The 10R jackpot is the jackpot in the second win / fail lottery, and the 4R jackpot is the jackpot in the first win / fail lottery. In the 10R big hit and the 4R big hit, in principle, the big winning opening 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is exhausted. Even in the case of a 2R big hit, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the big winning opening 20 may be opened in the same opening mode as the 10R big hit and the 4R big hit.

<Small hit game control means 265>
The small hit game control means 265 operates the small hit game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small hit. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the small hit game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the opening / closing control means 275. Similarly, the small hit game control means 265 is small when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small hit. It is determined that the winning game operating condition is satisfied, and the small hit game is executed by opening the large winning opening 20 to the open / close control means 275.

In the small hit game, the unit game is executed once, and the large winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small hit game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for about 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the large winning opening 20 to end the small hit game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls a normal game in a probable change state, a time saving state, and a ball entry easy state. The specific game control means 270 shifts the game state to the probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game when the special symbol is the symbol of the specific jackpot accompanied by the transition to the probable change. The probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the easy-to-enter state are continued until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 select the variation pattern having a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is substantially shortened. do. However, in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of holdings of the winning / failing lottery value by the holding control means 240 is referred to, and as the number of holdings by the holding control means 240 decreases, the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time tends to appear. In the easy-to-enter state, at least one of the three functions of probabilistic change of the normal symbol, shortening of the time of the normal symbol, and opening extension of the second starting port 12 is performed to enter the second starting port 12. Ball frequency (easiness of ball entry) is improved. During the probabilistic state, the probability that the hit / fail determination result by the first hit / miss determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 will be a big hit is maintained at a high value. Further, the specific game control means 270 causes the second starting port 12 to be in the open extension state when a specific big hit occurs, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning / failing lottery is the second winning / failing lottery. Move to a probabilistic state higher than the normal probability state.

<Open / close control means 275>
The opening / closing control means 275 controls the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 and the large winning opening 20. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the open / close control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12. In the normal state, the opening / closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 in the opening time of short opening or long opening according to the result of the opening lottery, and in the easy entry state, the opening time of long opening is the first. 2 The starting port 12 is opened. This is intended to improve the ease of entering the ball of the second starting port 12 so that the player can continue the game without reducing the number of balls held. In the special game, the open / close control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the large winning opening solenoid 92 to open the large winning opening 20.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power cut processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes the control start processing of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off and restored. The main power cutoff processing executing means 282 executes an abnormality response process such as a power supply cutoff process on the main board 200 when a power supply abnormality such as a power supply cutoff occurs. The main error detecting means 284 executes an abnormality detection process on the main board 200. The control start processing, the abnormality response processing, and the abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting change means 286, setting confirmation means 287>
The setting changing means 286 executes a "setting changing process" for changing the game setting. When the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the setting changing state, the setting changing means 286 shifts to the above-mentioned setting changing state. When the setting change state is changed to the setting change state, the setting change means 286 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory. The setting changing means 286 changes the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 173 in order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → ... in response to the pressing of the setting change button 172. , The setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as the display of the setting display unit 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting changing means 286 ends the setting changing state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming the game setting. When the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state and the RAM clear switch is not pressed and the power switch 150 is turned on, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the above-mentioned setting confirmation state. The setting confirmation means 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory when the setting confirmation state is entered. Unlike the setting change means 286 described above, the setting confirmation means 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even when the setting change button 172 is pressed, and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory. do not. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting value data managed by the setting memory may not be the numerical value of "1" to "6" but may use the numerical value of "0" to "5" instead. In this case, the setting value "0" corresponds to the setting 1, the setting value "1" corresponds to the setting 2, the setting value "2" corresponds to the setting 3, and the setting value "3" corresponds to the setting 4. , The setting value "4" may correspond to the setting 5, and the setting value "5" may correspond to the setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, the RAM clear process is performed when the RAM is abnormal, and when the set value data is set to the initial value "0", the abnormality is not judged. Can be simplified. Further, when executing some kind of lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting a different table or data for each set value in the look-ahead processing, there is an advantage that the offset processing for the selection can be simplified. .. For example, when "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, additional processing such as decrementing the start address by -1 is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as it is as the offset data. When the setting changing means 286 and the setting confirming means 287 use the numerical values of "0" to "5" as the setting value data, the numerical values of the setting value data may be displayed as they are on the setting display unit 173, or the setting may be performed. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the latter case, since the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted into the numerical values of the settings 1 to 6 in the game setting and displayed, the display can be easily understood by the administrator of the gaming machine.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 transmits the payout control command communication means 206 that sends the control command necessary for executing the payout or the like to the payout control board 155, and the sub-control that sends the control command necessary for the execution of the effect control or the like to the sub-board 300. Includes command transmission means 207. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command instructing the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening based on the determination of the winning ball to each winning opening by the winning ball determining means 201, and the main board 200. Send a command indicating the status of the error that occurred in. When the sub-control command transmission means 207 starts the symbol change, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol change to the effect determination means 303 together with the symbol change control command.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 fluctuates at the timing when the first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 start and stop the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. The start command and the fluctuation stop command are transmitted to the staging determination means 303 (sub-main). When the variation start command is transmitted, a value indicating each of the winning / failing determination result, the stop symbol, and the variation pattern determined or determined as the final determination and a value indicating whether it is the first winning / failing lottery or the second winning / failing lottery are set. It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When the variable stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variable stop command. Further, the effect determining means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a variation stop command, and the like to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variation display of the decorative symbol by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the staging control means 304 (sub-sub) is synchronized, and the interlocking is maintained. Further, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 to the staging determination means 303. After the pre-judgment result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, the winning openings (first start port 11, second start) corresponding to the pre-judgment result are started regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the lottery is started immediately. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the type information of the mouth 12), the information on the number of reserved pieces, the game state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, the so-called "look-ahead" process is realized, in which the sub-board 300 can speculatively recognize the winning / failing result before the order of starting the symbol variation comes around based on the received prior determination result. The processing based on the prior determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmission means 207 is set by the special game control means 260 information about the special game, the small hit game control means 265 information about the small hit game, the general drawing lottery means 213 lottery result information, and the setting change means 286. The setting value information of the game setting is transmitted to the sub board 300. Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 is transmitted to various controls on the main board 200 or to the main board 200, such as information on initial processing and information on errors by the main initial processing executing means 280 and the main error detecting means 284. Information about various signals and the like is appropriately transmitted to the sub-board 300.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a symbol mode determining means 301, a pattern storage means 302, an effect determining means 303, an effect controlling means 304, a timekeeping means 307, an effect setting means 308, a sub initial process executing means 360, a sub power cut processing executing means 362, and the like. The sub-error detecting means 364, the command receiving means 370, and the sub-side pre-determining means 371 are provided.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of staging patterns in which the staging image content to be displayed on the staging display device 60 and the display process thereof are defined in the variation of the decorative symbol 61. In the effect pattern, a plurality of variation effect patterns in which the variation process from the start to the stop of the variation in the variation display of the decorative symbol 61 and the effect process are defined, and the variation display of the decorative symbol are displayed separately, and the degree of expectation for a big hit. It includes a plurality of warning staging patterns that suggest the height of the variable display before the stop of the variable display.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side pre-determination means 371 holds the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. The effect determining means 303 includes a normal effect determining means 373 and a look-ahead effect determining means 374. The normal staging determination means 373 displays on the staging display device 60 by the staging control means 304 according to the information of the first winning / failing lottery determination result or the second winning / failing lottery determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the speaker. The content of the effect to be output to 108, the decorative lamp 111, etc. is determined. The effect determining means 303 determines the effect content according to the set value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205. The look-ahead effect determining means 374 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and determines the effect content to be output to the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the like. .. The normal effect determining means 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232, and is selected from a plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation patterns of the special symbol transmitted from the command communication means 205. Select one and read it from the pattern storage means 302. The normal staging determination means 373 sends the read out information of the variable staging pattern to the staging control means 304. The normal staging determination means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable staging pattern. The variation effect pattern may be determined by the normal effect determination means 373 with reference to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and varies together with the content of the look-ahead effect by the look-ahead effect determination means 374. The production pattern may be determined. The look-ahead effect determining means 374 more accurately identifies and identifies the result of this determination based on the preliminary determination result from the command communication means 205, the past preliminary determination result held on the sub-board 300, the game state information, and the like. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before the final determination, and the content of the execution. Specifically, the look-ahead effect determining means 374 determines whether the current gaming state is in the probability fluctuation game, and then shifts to the normal gaming state based on the pre-determination result before the pre-determination result received this time. Determine whether or not to do so. Based on the judgment result, the pass / fail result of this judgment and the selected fluctuation pattern related to the pre-judgment result received this time are specified, and the execution possibility of the look-ahead effect and the execution content of the look-ahead effect are determined based on the specific result. .. Since the staging determining means 303 has many parts in which the normal staging determining means 373 and the pre-reading staging determining means 374 cooperate with each other, the staging determining means 303 will be described as a comprehensive staging determining means 303 except for a particularly necessary part.

In each variation effect pattern, the variation time is set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of the effect image having the same variation time according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination and arrangement of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol 61 by the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the decoration. It is decided according to the variation effect pattern of the symbol. The symbol mode determining means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of the stopped symbols to the staging control means 304. The symbol mode determining means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to for determining a stop symbol of a decorative symbol.

The stop symbol of the decorative symbol 61 is formed as a combination of three symbols, for example, when the hit / fail determination result by the first hit / fail determination means 221 and the second hit / fail determination means 222 indicates a shift to a special game of 4R jackpot or 10R jackpot. Is selected as a specific combination, for example, a combination in which three symbols such as "777" and "111" are aligned. When the hit / fail judgment result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, a specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as "357" is selected, but the specific combination is not necessarily a combination of three symbols. It does not have to be. If the hit / fail judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination in which the three symbols are not aligned, such as "312" and "946", and it is a specific combination selected for a 2R big hit or a small hit. The combination that does not apply is selected. If the hit / fail judgment result is not a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and a variation pattern indicating a loss with reach is selected, a combination such as "191" or "727" in which only one symbol is not aligned. Select.

The variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol defines a variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, an effect process from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation. The variable effect pattern includes a pattern for displaying a normal out-of-order symbol, a pattern for displaying an out-of-order symbol through a reach state that becomes a big hit if one more symbol is aligned, and a big hit symbol after a reach state. The pattern when doing is included. In particular, the pattern when going through the reach state includes a pattern having various long and short fluctuation times. In each variation effect pattern, the variation time is set for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determining means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol having the same variation time as the special symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In the time saving state, when the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 is a pattern for time saving, the effect determining means 303 is a variation in which the effect content for time saving is determined. Select an effect pattern. The effect content for time reduction is an effect in which a background image or sound that impresses the player in an advantageous state due to time reduction or probability change is output.

The notice effect pattern is an effect pattern for temporarily displaying an image, animation, video, or the like of a specific character or motif on the screen, an effect pattern for operating an accessory, or an effect pattern for outputting a specific voice. The effect of the advance notice effect pattern is executed in parallel with the symbol change, and it is suggested in advance that the symbol change is highly expected to stop in the jackpot mode. For example, there is a normal advance notice effect in which only one image of a character is displayed on the screen, and a group advance notice effect in which a group of a large number of characters is displayed so as to pass from one end to the other end of the screen. Further, a step-up notice effect is further included in which the display process of the notice effect is divided into a plurality of stages, the number of stages to be displayed is variable, and the higher the number of stages, the higher the expectation for the big hit.

The notice effect pattern includes a pattern (notice after reach) in which the effect is executed at the timing after the display mode of the decorative symbol 61 is in the reach state to announce the final stop mode of the symbol, and the decorative symbol 61. There is a pattern (pre-reach notice) that simultaneously announces that the production will be executed at the timing when it is not stopped and the reach state will be reached.

The effect determining means 303 should determine whether or not to display the advance notice effect on the effect display device 60 according to the determination result of the winning / failing lottery or the advance determination result by a predetermined advance notice lottery, set the advance effect, and display the effect. Determine the notice production pattern. The effect determining means 303 holds a notice determination table to be referred to for determining whether or not to display the notice effect, and a notice type table to be referred to when selecting the type of the notice effect pattern. The notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to depending on the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery or the preliminary judgment result, and if the winning / failing lottery is successful, the notice effect is displayed with a higher probability than in the case of losing. Therefore, the correspondence between the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery and whether or not to display the notice effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to suggest a high degree of expectation for a big hit by displaying the notice effect itself.

The staging control means 304 causes the staging display device 60 to fluctuately display the staging image including the decorative symbol 61 according to the selected fluctuating staging pattern data. The staging control means 304 sets that the reception of the change start command of the decorative symbol 61 is a condition for starting the variation display of the new decorative symbol. When the effect determination means 303 determines that the effect control means 304 displays the advance notice effect, the effect control means 304 displays the advance notice effect according to the selected advance notice effect pattern on the effect display device 60 in a form of superimposing it on the effect of the symbol variation. Let me.

If the winning / failing lottery value of the second winning / failing lottery is stored, the effect control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning / failing lottery, and whether the winning / failing lottery value of the first winning / losing lottery is stored. Regardless of whether or not, the symbol variation display corresponding to the second winning / failing lottery is started. As a result, when the lottery value is reserved for both the first win / fail lottery and the second win / fail lottery, the lottery value held in the second win / fail lottery is preferentially read out and the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. .. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning / failing lottery is not read and the change of the decorative symbol does not start until the number of holdings in the second winning / failing lottery becomes 0. In this way, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variation display of the decorative symbol 61.

The staging control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66. The effect control means 304 includes an effect display control means 305, a voice control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The effect display control means 305 controls the display on the effect display device 60, and the sound control means 306 controls the sound output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111.

While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are changing, it is necessary to display an image indicating that the symbol is changing on the effect display device 60. Normally, a normal size decorative symbol 61 having a certain size is variablely displayed, but in a manner that hinders the visibility of the variable display of the normal size decorative symbol 61, other than the variation of the decorative symbol 61 is the main production content. You may display a special effect to be performed. In this case, the player is presented with the fact that the symbol is being changed by variablely displaying an alternative symbol which is a decorative symbol having a size smaller than that of the normal size decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative symbol, it means a normal size decorative symbol, but when it is distinguished from an alternative symbol, the normal size decorative symbol is also referred to as a "normal decorative symbol" or a "main decorative symbol".

The alternative symbol is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is impaired, for example, while the normal decorative symbol is hidden. The alternative symbol is a form of a decorative symbol for suggesting a hit / fail judgment result in a staging manner, has a simpler (in other words, simplified, simplified) display form than the normal decorative symbol, and is a normal decorative symbol. It is displayed in a simpler fluctuation process. The alternative symbol has an appearance display form corresponding to a portion indicating a symbol type of a normal decorative symbol, and has, for example, a display form representing a number, a character, or a symbol indicating the symbol type. Further, the alternative symbol is variablely displayed in a narrower area than the area where the decorative symbol is normally variablely displayed, and is typically at a position where the main effect by elements other than the symbol is not easily hindered, for example, in the corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. It is displayed in a variable manner. The alternative symbol is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative symbol, but has at least a display form in which the symbol type can be visually identified. The alternative symbol may be a reduced version of the normal decorative symbol as it is, or may be the same as the normal decorative symbol except for the size.

The plurality of alternative symbols displayed in place of the plurality of normal decorative symbols suggests a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning / failing lottery will be in a favorable state to the player depending on the combination of the stop modes at the end of the fluctuation. For example, it is suggested that a plurality of alternative symbols have a high expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation by being in a reach state in which two of the three alternative symbols are in the same reach state. In addition, the left and right symbols that are in the reach state are specific types of symbols that suggest that the expectations are relatively high, such as "3" and "7", and the expectations such as "1" and "2" are high. By having a kind of symbol that suggests that it is relatively low, it may suggest that the degree of expectation of the reach state is high or low. It should be noted that the alternative symbol does not enter a definite stop state in appearance, but becomes a temporary stop state in which minute shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the substitute symbol, the normal decorative symbol may be displayed instead of the substitute symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in a fixed stop state. Further, instead of displaying the normal decorative symbol and the alternative symbol exclusively, the display period may overlap. Furthermore, at a predetermined effect in which the visibility of the normal decorative symbol is impaired, the variation display of the normal decorative symbol may be continued and the variation of the alternative symbol may be displayed. Unlike the alternative symbol, the special symbol is changing in an image as small as or smaller than the alternative symbol in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A simple symbol suggesting that there is may be displayed in a variable manner. The simple symbol may be composed of a variable display of three symbol combinations as in the normal decorative symbol, a variable display of one symbol, or a simple symbol ("○", "×", etc.). May be configured by sequentially switching. The simple symbol has no relation to the variation display mode of the normal decorative symbol or the alternative symbol, and displays a certain variation from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbol, and is related to the stop display mode of the normal decorative symbol at the time of stop display. May be displayed. It should be noted that the simple symbol may be changed as appropriate as long as it suggests that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the result of the special symbol is at least notified, such as displaying a combination of two symbols. Further, the simple design may be referred to as a "simple decorative design", a "sub-decorative design", a "sub-decorative design", a "mini-decorative design", a "mini-decorative design", or the like. Apart from the effect display device 60, a variable display of a decorative symbol called a fourth symbol, which indicates a display equivalent to a simple symbol by a light emitting mode such as an LED, may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during change of the special symbol, display of the result) when a problem occurs in the effect display device 60. As an example of the display mode of the fourth symbol, the LEDs light up in sequence of "white", "blue", "green", "yellow", "orange", and "red" (blinking including extinguishing is also possible). It may be displayed in a variable manner, or it may be displayed in a single color according to the type of the special symbol to indicate the variable display, and the emission color when the stop display may be used to indicate the type of off or big hit.

The timekeeping means 307 is a timekeeping circuit that outputs time information used for the game. The timekeeping means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from the time when the power is turned on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit having a built-in battery and capable of continuously measuring the date and time by the battery even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off or when a power failure occurs may be used. In the case of the real-time clock circuit, there is a possibility that the time of each game console may differ slightly due to individual differences and time deviations, whereas in the case of the timer circuit, the time difference between multiple game consoles as long as the power is turned on at the same time. Is unlikely to occur.

The effect determining means 303 executes a tuning effect that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the time measuring means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The tuning effect is an effect to be displayed on the effect display device 60 during the synchronized effect period, which is a period substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the symbol variation and the game state. The tuning effect period extends for several minutes, the length of which is longer than the symbol variation time for one time, and may include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The effect pattern of the synchronized effect is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the effect pattern defines the reproduction of a predetermined music and video. A plurality of types of staging patterns for synchronized staging are prepared, and different types of staging patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as month, date, day of the week, and time.

The entrainment effect is executed regardless of whether it is during a normal game or a special game. Here, "during normal game" includes the display of the so-called standby demo screen. That is, "during normal game" includes (1) "normal game during variable display" in which the symbol is variablely displayed, and (2) "normal game during variable stop" in which neither the variable display of the symbol nor the standby demo screen is displayed. , (3) "Normal game while displaying the standby demo screen", which is not displaying the variation of the symbol but displaying the standby demo screen, is included. The tuning effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the cases of (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling the volume reduction and the brightness reduction in the tuning effect is (1). It can be different from the time of. In addition, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information about the mobile cooperation system described later by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when the operation is input, the video and audio of the synchronized effect are output. It is suppressed, and the screen display such as production customization by the mobile cooperation system is prioritized.

The tuning effect is, for example, an effect of reproducing a performance or a video of a predetermined song at a predetermined time (referred to as “synchronization effect start time”). The time that triggers the reproduction of the tuning effect may be the time reached at a predetermined time interval from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time every hour or half hour based on the standard time. May be. Alternatively, a time that may vary depending on the date or day of the week may be set, and the interval may be different, such as first one hour later, then three hours later, instead of a fixed interval such as "every hour". The interval may vary depending on the date and day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be specified by the game clerk for each game store. However, it is set in advance so that the same tuning effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of the same models installed in the same game store. For example, in the case of a specification triggered by a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from the time when the power is turned on, a plurality of units are turned on at the same time in a game store. As a result, the same tuning effect is simultaneously executed on the plurality of game consoles when the predetermined time is reached. As a result, the production is displayed at the same time as if they were synchronized by multiple units, and the same music and video are played at the same time, creating a synergistic and realistic feeling as if a live performance or movie was being screened on the spot. A directing effect can be obtained.

The function of tuning effect is also built into another game console of the same model, and multiple game consoles on the same game island are turned on at the same time by a game clerk every day. Then, the plurality of game consoles that are turned on at the same time all reach the synchronization effect start time almost at the same time, and the synchronization effect can be executed simultaneously at the same time. This is called a multiple-unit synchronous production. In that case, not only the display of the image is synchronized with multiple units, but also the output of sound effects and background music is synchronized with multiple units, and the more units are synchronized, the more synergistic effect is obtained by executing the production all at once. It will increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes a history of game results and a history of production results. The history of game results is the result of a game that leads to a ball output that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of probability changes, and the number of time reductions. The history of the production result is different from the game profit, and is recorded in order to obtain the profit such as the right to change the content and type of the production and the right to make it easier for a specific type of production to appear. It is information such as the score of. For example, in order to score the number of appearances of a predetermined effect, the result of a mini game, and the like and give it to the player, coded information indicating the score and the game history, for example, a two-dimensional code is displayed on the screen. When the player reads the two-dimensional code with the camera of his / her mobile terminal and decodes it, the score and the game history information obtained by the decoding are stored in the player's mobile terminal. The cooperation system between the gaming machine and the player's mobile terminal via the two-dimensional code will be described later. The score here is necessary to expand the range of effect customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). It is a specification that the items that can be customized increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the setting of which of a plurality of types of effect content options is selected as the effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and the game history. For example, as an effect pattern to be displayed during a special game, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different displayed motifs, characters, and songs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is made to select which effect is to be displayed. I will do it. Alternatively, a plurality of types of motifs or character designs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as the design of the design included in the decorative design that changes the design, and the player is allowed to select which of the designs is to be displayed. In such a case, when the player accepts the operation of the effect button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed and the effect pattern is selected through the operation, the effect setting means 308 selects the selected content. Remember. The effect determining means 303 selects the type of the effect pattern during the special game according to the settings stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub-initial processing execution means 360 executes the control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is turned off and restored. The sub-power cutoff processing executing means 362 executes an abnormality response process such as a power supply cutoff process on the sub-board 300 when a power supply abnormality such as a power supply cutoff occurs. The sub-error detecting means 364 executes the abnormality detection process on the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detecting means 364 detects the power cutoff, the sub-power cutoff processing executing means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as the power cutoff process.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of a mobile phone cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, the player registers the user by setting an account and a password in the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site in advance on the mobile terminal 354. When the effect button 109 is pressed by the player at the start of the game, the effect display control means 305 displays the two-dimensional code 350, which encodes the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, on the screen of the effect display device 60. The player is made to read it with the camera of the mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. Character information (also called "password information") in which the player's identification information and the effect score history are encoded is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 displays the password information input screen on the effect display device 60, and causes the player to input the password information via a button operation such as a cross key 110. By decoding the input password information by the effect setting means 308 and registering it as the player's identification information and the effect score history, the player's previous game content and effect score state can be inherited. The input of this password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start the effect customization for selecting various effect elements. After that, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, as the game and the effect progress, the points given by the effect setting means 308 to the player as a benefit for the effect are added as needed and accumulated as the effect score history, and the player. Can customize the effect at any time and select and set the desired element as various effect elements. The score for the production is basically added for each symbol change, and the higher the production type with the higher expectation of transition to the special game, the higher the score is given, and the higher the score is given even when the transition to the special game is performed.

As an effect customization, the player uses a part of the accumulated points, and according to the number of points used, the color, background, shape, character, and the color, background, shape, and character that constitute the effect content displayed on the effect display device 60. You can change the production elements such as music to your favorite type. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element via a button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. As for the staging element that can be customized, a plurality of types of items are prepared for each element, and different values are set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is given. When the player operates a button as an instruction to end the game or the effect customization, the effect setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 in which information such as a privilege on the effect and the effect score history is encoded, and controls the effect display. The means 305 displays on the effect display device 60. The player can read the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his / her own mobile terminal and decode the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354. Further, the information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 354 to the game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as effects on the effect and the effect score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via the transmission means of displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. The content of the game and the production can be taken over in the next game. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the number of symbol fluctuations and the number of staging increases, and the score can be obtained.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291 and a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling the overall game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291 and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). The entry signal from each entry port, the payout signal from the payout control board 155, and the like are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as the winning port solenoid, the first special symbol display unit 41, and the second special symbol display unit 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). Further, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as a result of a winning / failing lottery, a result of determining a symbol, and a result of determining a variation pattern. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 by one-way communication.

The instruction data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte configuration consisting of a combination of 1-byte instruction type data, so-called MODE data, and 1-byte instruction content data, so-called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by transmitting the command type data and the command content data to the sub board 300 in association with each other. The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the instruction type, and a unique type code is assigned to each instruction type in advance at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of the instruction type data and the instruction content data is an identification bit indicating whether the instruction type data or the instruction content data is used. When the most significant bit is 1, it indicates that the instruction type data is the most significant bit. When the bit is 0, it indicates that it is instruction content data.

Communication from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is a specification in which 1 byte of data is transmitted for each data transmission, so it is necessary to transmit 1 byte each twice in order to transmit 2 bytes of instruction data. .. The MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and the EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise or the like, the main board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the same data is read twice in succession by the sub board 300, the completion of transmission / reception of the data is confirmed. .. The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read two times in a row, and transmits the same data up to five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub CPU 310, a sub RAM 311, a sub ROM 312, and an effect control device 313. The sub ROM 312 is one of the data storage means for holding the sub control program including the effect pattern data in which the effect process is defined and the display pattern data in which the effect display process is defined. A sub control program including effect pattern data, display pattern data, and voice pattern data is read from the sub ROM 312 into the sub RAM 311, and the effect control by the sub control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). Signals from an external device such as the effect button 109 are acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives and outputs an effect display device 60, a speaker 108, a decorative lamp 111, a movable accessory 66, and the like by an effect control device 313, various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data. , Voice output, lamp lighting, and control of the effect of the accessory operation. The sub CPU 310 transmits the display pattern data and the voice pattern data to the effect control device 313. In this embodiment, an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the staging control device 313 will be described, but the sub-board 300 and the staging control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a board, and are separated and connected to each other. It may be formed as a separate substrate.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the staging control device 313. The staging control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and a voice control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a data-compressed state. The staging image data is an image used for a variable display or a staging display as an staging object showing a judgment result of a winning / failing lottery. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data in which the motion is defined when the staging motion is added to the images used for various staging at a predetermined timing. The voice data is voice data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and character lines that are output during the production.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data specified in the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the effect display using the effect image data and motion data. Is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, commands, effect image data, and motion data related to the effect display are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and display control is performed by the display control circuit 326. Similarly, commands and voice data related to voice output are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the voice control circuit 314, and voice output control is performed by the voice control circuit 314.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each of which is connected via the bus 330. The bus 330 in this figure comprehensively shows buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus for convenience.

The staging image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data among the data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (VideoRAM) that is used as a work area for decoding the staging image data or motion data by the decoder 332, or as a work area for executing drawing processing or image processing by the drawing circuit 336. ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image, and the generated display image is used as a frame of a moving image as a frame buffer. Store in 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing a frame of a moving image to be output to the effect display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order in which they are stored. The frame buffer 338 has, for example, a memory area for two frames, and while the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image. Store in the memory area for another frame.

The data ROM 324 holds "detailed display pattern data" in which the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 is defined. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be called "rough display pattern data" in which the outline of the effect display process is defined. For example, the schematic display pattern data defines a rough flow of a series of staging display processes such as fluctuation start and fluctuation stop timings of decorative symbols, playback order of a plurality of moving images, and playback start and stop timings. .. On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data includes detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative patterns and the display processing order for each frame for displaying moving images based on motion data. The process is defined.

When the staging control device 313 performs display control based on the "rough display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect control device 313 reads the "detailed display pattern data" required for the processing from the data ROM 324 and uses both display pattern data. And execute the display process. Therefore, it can be said that the staging control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display putter data including the “rough display pattern data” and the “detailed display pattern data”. Therefore, in the present specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the "rough display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished, and simply "display pattern data" is used. ". For example, when the staging control means performs a specific process based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, the display pattern data includes "rough display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". .. In the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into "rough display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data", and even if the display pattern data that serves as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324. good.

In this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the staging control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In the modification, the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, the data ROM 324, and the display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the process that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the staging control device 313 may execute a process that is executed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Further, the control RAM 322 included in the staging control device 313 may also serve as the function of the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. In addition, the effect control device 313 may have a hardware configuration that does not include the display control circuit 326. In this case, the process that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. May be done.

Further, in this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes a configuration in which the staging control device 313 is included in addition to the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 and the sub ROM 312. In the modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 and the ROM 312 and the staging control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the process that is supposed to be executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub RAM 311 may also have the function of the control RAM 322, and the sub ROM 312 may also have the function of the data ROM 324. In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration that does not include the staging control device 313. In this case, the process that is supposed to be executed by the staging control device 313 is executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311 or the sub ROM 312. You may.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the main board 200 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start processing is executed by the main initial processing execution means 280, and will be described below as being executed by the main CPU 290 that functions as the main initial processing execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets the stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial hardware-related settings such as the setting of the internal registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

The main CPU 290 confirms the operation state of the setting key, and if the setting key is in the ON state (Y in S105), confirms the operation state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S122), the setting change process is executed (S124). On the other hand, if the RAM clear is OFF (N in S122), the setting confirmation process is executed (S126). If the setting key is in the OFF state in S105 (N in S105), the processes of S122 to S126 are skipped.

Subsequently, the power supply cutoff / recovery process or the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed according to the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power supply cutoff information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the process at the time of power off / recovery is executed. do. In other cases, that is, even when the RAM clear switch is turned on or the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power failure information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, the initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and when the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). When the RAM clear switch is not turned on (N in S106), the main CPU 290 confirms the value of the power cutoff information flag (S108). If the value of the power off information flag does not match the power off normal data (N in S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power off information flag matches the power off normal data (Y in S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is inspected (S110). As will be described later, if the processing is normally completed when the power is turned off last time, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291. Therefore, the main CPU 290 uses the checksum. Check the data in the main RAM 291. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), the data in the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), the process for returning to the state before the power is turned off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), the power-on normal data indicating that the power was turned on normally is stored in the power-off information flag, and the initial setting of various errors and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 155 are executed. do. Subsequently, the command request for the untransmitted portion before the power is turned off is cleared, and the command transmission of various information indicating the game state is requested. Subsequently, an effect command corresponding to the number of pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open / closed state of the second starting port 12 and the large winning opening 20 is restored to the state before the power was cut off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared by 0, the initial setting of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. In the initialization process of S116, the set value stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 is not cleared, and the set value set in the setting change process of S124 is retained as it is.

When the power cutoff / recovery process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to activate the interrupt process described later, and the operation of the interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, after that, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt process described later is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes the main process for managing the gaming machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N in S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the set memory value is normal (Y in S132), the process in S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the state shifts to the setting change state (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S138). If there is a change operation by the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is updated and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N of S140), the process of S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N in S144), the processes of S138 to S142 are repeated. When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the original state and turned off (Y in S144), the setting display unit 173 is hidden so that the set value cannot be visually recognized (S146), and the process returns.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N in S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the set memory value is normal (Y in S152), the process of S154 is skipped. The state shifts to the setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value, and if the setting key is OFF (Y in S160), the setting display unit 173 is hidden. (S162) makes the set value invisible and returns.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 temporarily prohibits timer interruption (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors the power failure (S204). When a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected in a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), a power supply cutoff storage is executed by inputting an unconditional interruption request signal from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit to the main CPU 290. In the process, the power off confirmation data is stored in the power off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y in S206), executes the process for power-off. Therefore, proceed to S212. If the value of the power off confirmation flag does not match the power off confirmation data (N in S206), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random value per special symbol, and the soft initial value random value per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number update process is executed (S208), the timer interruption is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. After that, S200 to S210 are repeated. When the timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is prohibited (S202 to S208), the interrupt process described later is executed after the timer interrupt is permitted in S210.

When the power failure is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and confirms the content of the power failure information flag (S214). If the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is not saved normally, and the power-off error data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216), proceed to S222. If the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is normally saved, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, in order to inspect the backed up data of the main RAM 291 at the next power-on, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Subsequently, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and a loop is performed until the power is turned off. The main power cutoff processing execution means 282 realized by the main CPU 290 executes the above-mentioned processing when the power is turned off.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the details of the interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, the interrupt operation condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Next, in order to manage the game machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312). , 2nd start port valid period setting process (S314), prize monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol change start Monitoring process (S324), start port monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), large winning opening valid period setting process (S332), special symbol change start monitoring control Processing (S334), abnormality detection processing (S336), ball entry passage time abnormality detection processing (S338), game status display processing (S340), handle status signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), firing control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), effect control command transmission processing (S352), and external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interruption is permitted. (S356) and return.

In the input process (S304), the data of the input port of the switch mounted on the game board surface, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the door / frame opening signal, the magnetic detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the touch state signal is monitored. , Data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291. The data indicating this input state are level data (data of the input port at the time of this interruption) and rising data or falling data (data of the input port at the time of this interruption and data at the time of the previous interruption). Data indicating a switch in which switching was observed by comparing the data of the input port with an exclusive logical sum).

In the various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291. If the value is less than the predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is equal to or more than the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the subtraction result is stored when the result of subtracting the predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, and the predetermined maximum value is stored when the result is less than 0. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value, maximum value, and initial value of each random number are read from the main RAM 291 and the value of the random number is incremented. If the result of the increment exceeds the maximum value, the value of the random number is set to 0. If the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated every time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the value of the random number returns to the initial value, that is, it goes around the range of random numbers. Then, the initial value is newly set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291 and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the result of the increment exceeds the upper limit, the value of the initial random number is set to 0. The same process is executed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the table, and when the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the value of the timer is 0, the timer is not updated.

In the second starting port valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second starting port 12 is set. At the second starting port 12, the valid period in which the prize ball is paid out and the lottery related to the second special symbol is executed by the entry of the game ball, and the prize ball is paid out and the second special even if the game ball enters. An invalid period is set in which the lottery related to the symbol is not executed. As will be described later, in the start port monitoring control process (S326), the monitoring process for winning the second start port is not executed during the invalid period of the second start port 12, so that the game ball enters the second start port 12. Even so, the payout of prize balls and the lottery related to the second special symbol will not be executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set in the first starting port 11, the large winning opening 20, the first operating opening 31, the second operating opening 32, the general winning opening 33, and the like. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal electric accessory is operating", the data indicating that the second start port 12 is the valid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag. If the state of the normal symbol is not "normal electric accessory is operating" and the value of the second start port effective extension timer is not 0, the second start port 12 is the valid period in the second start port valid period flag. If the value of the second start port valid extension timer is 0, the data indicating that the second start port is in the invalid period is stored in the second start port valid period flag.

In the prize monitoring process (S316), the passage of the game ball to the switch is inspected, and when the game ball passes through the switch, the switch has no invalid period or is currently in the valid period, and the prize ball is paid out. If so, update the winning counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of commands.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of received data from the payout control board 155. Are executed in order.

In the normal symbol actuating gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the first actuating port 31 and the second actuating port 32 of the game ball is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first actuating port 31 or the second actuating port 32. When the number of reserved symbols is less than 4, which is the upper limit, the number of reserved ordinary symbols is updated and the random numbers related to the ordinary symbols are stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol is being controlled, the process related to the normal symbol display unit 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. If the state of the normal symbol is "normal symbol changing", the normal symbol changing process is executed, and if it is "normal symbol stop symbol display", the normal symbol stop symbol display processing is executed and "normal electric" is executed. If it is "during the operation of the normal electric accessory", the process during the operation of the normal electric accessory is executed, and if it is "during the demonstration of the end of the operation of the normal electric accessory", the process during the demonstration of the end of the operation of the normal electric accessory is executed. In the process of changing the normal symbol, after changing the normal symbol, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has ended, the fluctuation stop setting of the normal symbol is executed and the state of the normal symbol is changed to ". Set to "Normal symbol stop symbol is being displayed". In the process of displaying the normal symbol stop symbol, the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the normal symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal electric accessory is in operation", the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the start of normal electric accessory operation is saved, and the normal electric accessory operation starts. The operation setting of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory opening extension function at the time is executed. In the case of off, the state of the normal symbol is set to "waiting for normal symbol change". When the winning number of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the game ball is monitored in the processing during the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, and it is determined that the number of winnings of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings. Performs the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the setting of the effective extension time of the second start port. If it is determined that the number of winnings in the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum number of winnings, the opening / closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the ordinary electric accessory 90 is used. If it is determined that the opening / closing of the entrance of the winning opening related to the above is completed and the opening of the entrance of the normal electric accessory 90 is completed, the operation end setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the second starting opening are valid. Execute the extension time setting. If it is determined that the opening / closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not ended, the setting of opening / closing the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not executed. In the process during the demonstration of the end of operation of the ordinary electric accessory, the operation end demo time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation end demo time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is over, the state of the ordinary symbol is changed to "ordinary symbol". Set to "Waiting for fluctuation".

In the normal symbol change start monitoring process (S324), when the state of the normal symbol is monitored, "waiting for normal symbol change", and the value of the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation is other than 0, the normal symbol changes. Judge to start. When it is determined to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation is decremented, and the hit judgment, the determination of the stop symbol, the setting of the fluctuation pattern number of the normal symbol, and the setting of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are executed. .. After that, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol changing", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for the state setting of the normal symbol, the hit determination, and the determination of the fluctuation pattern is cleared.

In the start opening monitoring control process (S326), the first starting opening 11 winning and the second starting opening 12 winning of the game ball are monitored. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of pending balls of the first special symbol is less than 4, the built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the acquired built-in random number is added. It is stored in the buffer as a random number per special symbol used in the jackpot judgment. Further, as random numbers related to the special symbol, a symbol random number and a variable pattern random number are acquired and stored. When the hold of the second special symbol is prioritized over the hold of the first special symbol, only the update of the hold related to the prize is executed, but when the hold order of the special symbol is the winning order, the hold is executed. In addition to updating the hold related to the prize, the total number of holds is updated and the winning order is stored. Next, in order to request a notice effect command corresponding to the random number memorized at the start opening prize, if the state of the gaming machine is confirmed and it is determined that the command transmission period is reached, a hit notice effect request, a hit design notice effect request, and a pattern notice are requested. Execute the production requests in order. Here, when (1) waiting for a hit and the random number related to the first special symbol is stored while the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is not operating, (2) waiting for a hit and the normal symbol When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored while the probability fluctuation function is not activated, or (3) when the random number related to the second special symbol is stored during the big hit or the small hit. , Judge that it is the command transmission period. Next, a production command corresponding to the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol has been updated. As described above, in the look-ahead, four pieces of the prior determination information (preliminary hit / fail determination information, prior symbol determination information, prior pattern determination information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-determination process, but in another example, when there is a ball entering the starting port, the command is uniformly transmitted and can be read ahead. The sub CPU 310 may perform various situation determinations such as whether or not it is a period. Next, the value of the second starting port validity period flag is inspected, and if the value of the second starting port validity period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is a valid period, the first starting port winning prize is awarded. As in the case, the monitoring process of the second start opening winning is executed. When the value of the second starting port valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is an invalid period, the monitoring process of the second starting port winning is not executed. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is once changed from 0 to 1, and then the control process related to the start of fluctuation described later is executed. ..

In the special symbol control process (S328), the hit waiting state is inspected, and when the special electric accessory is in operation, that is, during a big hit or a small hit, the special symbol control process is terminated. If the special electric accessory is not operating, the state of the special symbol is inspected, if it is "waiting for special symbol change", the special symbol control general-purpose processing is terminated, and if it is "start of change", the special symbol change. The start process is executed, and if "special symbol is changing", the special symbol change process is executed, and if "special symbol stop symbol is being displayed", the special symbol stop symbol display process is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the sub-board 300 is started to display the effect. Request commands for additional symbol information, variation pattern, and character information, set the state of the special symbol to "special symbol variation in progress", and clear the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern with 0. .. In the process during special symbol change, after the special symbol is changed, the change time is monitored, and if it is determined that the change time of the special symbol has ended, the change stop setting of the special symbol is set and the state of the special symbol is changed to "special". Set to "Stop symbol display". In the process of displaying the special symbol stop symbol, the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the special symbol has ended, the operation end setting of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special symbol, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol change", the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously activated is set, and the probability of the special symbol is set. The variable function, the variable time shortening function of the special symbol, the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the variable time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory are disabled, and the state of the gaming machine is prepared to open the big winning opening. Set in, set the hit start demo display time, command request for hit start demo effect, and command request for launch position specification effect (command request to execute an effect that suggests a recommended launch position such as "right-handed") To execute. When the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the operation end judgment of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is performed, and the special symbol is performed. In order to end the operation of, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol change", set the state of the gaming machine during the small hit start demo, set the hit start demo display time, and set the hit start demo effect. Execute the command request and the command request for the firing position designation effect. If the result of the hit judgment is wrong, the operation end judgment of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation pattern selection state is updated, the command request of the game state is performed, and the special symbol is displayed. In order to terminate the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol change", and the command request for the firing position designation effect is executed.

In the special electric bonus control process (S330), in order to execute the process related to the special electric bonus, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric bonus is inspected, and the condition device is operating or the special electric bonus is operating. If it is determined, the processing related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating state of the special electric accessory, the processing during preparation for opening the large winning opening, the processing during operation of the special electric accessory, the processing during closing of the large winning opening, the processing during the big hit end demonstration, the processing during the small hit start demonstration, the small hit special electric Execute processing during operation, processing during closing of the small hit big winning opening, and processing during demonstration of the end of small hit.

In the large winning opening valid period setting process (S332), in order to save the result of the valid period determination of the large winning opening 20, if the value of the large winning opening valid time is 0, the large winning opening valid period flag is set to a large winning prize. The mouth invalid period data is stored, and if it is other than 0, the big prize opening validity period data is stored in the big winning opening validity period flag.

In the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a state where the change can be started. When the digestion order of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the priority digestion of the second special symbol, (1) it is not in the big hit or the small hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for change, (3). ) When the second special symbol is waiting for change and (4) the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol is other than 0, the special symbol can start changing. Is determined. When the digestion order of the reserved balls of the special symbol is the winning order, in addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol is other than 0, (6) the relevant When all of the determinations that the digestion order, that is, the winning order is matched, are satisfied, it is determined that the special symbol can start to change.

When it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing, the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is subtracted, and an effect command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Next, the hit determination of the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, a random number per special symbol is used to determine whether the hit is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, the design is decided. In the determination of the symbol, if the hit judgment is a big hit, the big hit symbol is determined based on the special symbol hit symbol random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit symbol is determined, and if it is a miss, the missed symbol is lost. Is determined.

When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the operation content of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is determined based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit symbol determined in the symbol determination process, and the operation content of the special symbol is determined. Set the game state after the big hit, such as the operation content of the fluctuation time shortening function and the setting of the normal symbol winning easy state. Next, the settings during the big hit, such as the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously and the contents of the opening time of the big winning opening, are executed. Next, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big hit based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of the normal symbol. Next, the start demo time and the end demo time are set with reference to the table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of the winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

If the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends, the content of the fluctuation pattern selection state is set, the start demo time and the end demo time are set, and the hit. The area of the main RAM 291 used for the determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is wrong, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 inspects the magnetic detection signal, the short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the door / frame opening signal, and changes in the error state. If there is, the error state is stored and the sub-board 300 is requested to display the error state effect of the game machine. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the error state storage and the error state effect display request are not executed.

In the incoming ball passing time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detecting means 284 monitors the continuous on time of each switch level in order to detect the incoming ball passing time abnormality, and the continuous on time (continuous on time). For example, if it is determined that the value of the counter that increments for each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, the setting of the ball entry passage time error, the command transmission request, and the security of outputting to the external information output terminal 160. Create output requests in sequence. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the abnormality of the ball entry transit time. If it is determined that the continuous on-time is not abnormal, the security output request is not created.

In the game state display process (S340), the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of balls on hold for normal symbol operation, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol are requested to be displayed. Create data.

In the handle state signal inspection process (S342), in order to monitor the touch state of the handle, the handle state is inspected, and if it is determined that the handle state has changed as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer is subtracted and the handle state is changed. Update, set the handle status monitoring timer, and execute the command transmission request for the handle status effect. If it is determined that there is no change in the handle status as a result of the inspection, the handle status monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle status monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being subtracted, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output processing (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol, the display of the number of balls on hold for operation of the normal symbol, the display of the game state, and the special electric accessory are continuous. Initialization of the display to display the number of times of operation, display of the operation status of the special electric accessory when the continuous operation device of the accessory is not activated, display of hitting, display of error, display of prize ball ratio. , Acquire and output display data in order.

In the launch control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball, the setting of the prohibition / permit for launching corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 155 and the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, and After acquiring the firing prohibition / permission data, the firing prohibition / permission signal is output.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output processing (S350), in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 and the large winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 is acquired, and the output data of the large winning opening solenoid 92 is obtained. Acquire and output data. The operation flag and the operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and the output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and the solenoid operation timer are acquired. Next, the solenoid operation timer is updated and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the effect control command transmission process (S352), the presence or absence of a transmission request for the command to be transmitted to the sub-board 300 is inspected, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired and the command buffer used is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, retain MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be described in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include a random number per normal symbol and a random number with a fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol as random numbers related to the normal symbol, and a random number per special symbol (hard random number) as a random number related to the special symbol. , There are soft random numbers per special symbol, symbol random numbers per special symbol, and variable pattern random numbers. In addition, as random numbers for giving initial values of normal symbol per random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and special symbol per soft random number, which are initial value update type random numbers, normal symbol per initial value random number and special symbol per symbol initial value. There are random numbers and soft initial value random numbers per special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per normal symbol is the number of pending changes in the normal symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process that the game ball has passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. When is less than 4, which is the upper limit value, is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used for the hit determination and the determination of the stop symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324) to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 232, for example, is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is reserved for normal symbol fluctuation when it is determined in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. When the number is less than 4, which is the upper limit value, it is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol variation pattern when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324) that the normal symbol variation is to be started.

The random number per special symbol is obtained when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process. , It is generated by acquiring the values of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol and adding them, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The random number per special symbol is used to execute the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The soft random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start opening monitoring control process (S326). Obtained from a given position in the above and used to generate a random number per special symbol, as described above.

The symbol random number per special symbol takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is set to a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. Stored. The symbol random number per special symbol is the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start opening monitoring control process (S326). Is acquired from a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The symbol random number per special symbol is used to determine the jackpot symbol when the hit determination is a jackpot in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The variation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is a predetermined value of the main RAM 291 when the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). Obtained from the position and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The variation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

The initial value random number per ordinary symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol have the same range of values as the random number per ordinary symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the special random number in the initial value update type random number update process (S308). It is used as the initial value of each random number when updating the soft random number per symbol.

Since the interrupt process is executed at regular time intervals by timer interrupt, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update processes (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular time intervals. To. That is, the random number per ordinary symbol, the random number of the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol, the random number per special symbol, the soft random number per special symbol, the random number of the symbol per special symbol, and the random number of the variation pattern are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, in the main process (S120), the time from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer. Repeated for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process differs depending on the game state and the like, the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) includes various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), It is not executed at regular intervals. As a result, the initial value random number acquired when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random every time.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a control start process of the sub-board 300 in the pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the sub-initial process execution means 360, and will be described below as being executed by the sub CPU 310 that functions as the sub-initial process execution means 360. When the control of the sub-board 300 is started, the sub CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interruptions until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs register setting and port initialization of the sub CPU 310. Perform the initial settings related to the hardware (S504). The control program is read from the sub ROM 312 and placed in the sub RAM 311. Of the various variables in the control program, the initial value is set for the variable with the initial value, and the zero clear data is set for the variable without the initial value. This initializes the sub RAM 311 (S506). The interrupt process on the sub-board 300 includes a process when the power is turned on and a reset process when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled, as the interrupt process executed with the highest priority. Next, there is a command process received from the main board 200 as an interrupt process of priority level 7 having a high execution priority, and as an interrupt process of priority level 3 having the next highest priority, CPU runaway detection by a watchdog timer is performed. There is a time reset process. Next, as the priority level 2 interrupt process, there is a process related to commands sent and received to and from the control CPU 320, and as the lowest priority level 1 interrupt process, communication process with the real-time clock. There are various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to the above various processes occur at the same time, the interrupts set in advance for each interrupt type are executed with priority. The processing shown in this figure includes the processing when the power supply is turned on, which is the interrupt of the highest priority level, the reset processing when various abnormalities occur, and the reset processing when the CPU runaway is detected, which is the interruption of the priority level 3. include.

Interrupts (priority level 7) other than commands received from the main board 200 are prohibited (S510), and various error information used in the model is set from all the error information stored in advance for all models (S512). .. All the lamps such as the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the operation of the watchdog timer is started (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main process of S518 does not return to the main flow, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (small power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the main process of S518 in FIG. 20 in detail. In order to check in the main process of this figure whether the control program arranged in the sub RAM 311 is correctly arranged in S506 of FIG. 20, the start address for starting the check is acquired (S530), and in the subsequent processes. All interruptions are allowed (S532), and device initialization operations such as motors and solenoids are executed (S534).

If the setting is to use the watchdog timer, clear the watchdog timer (S536), update the decorative symbol counter so that the combination of the decorative symbols is a random combination (S540), and input the sub CPU 310. Is monitored (S542). Since S540 is a process in a method of determining an out-of-order symbol of a decorative symbol using a counter, in the case of a method of determining an out-of-decoration symbol of a decorative symbol using a lottery sheet incorporating all combinations of symbols that are out-of-order symbols. Does not execute the processing of S540. The process of determining the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a stop symbol of the special symbol is received from the main board 200 as described later in S552. The sub CPU 310, which functions as the sub-error detecting means 364, monitors the error state, notifies the error when various errors are detected (S544), and executes processing according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546). A notice lottery is executed (S548). In the advance notice lottery in S548, since the command of the advance notice effect to appear immediately after the start of the symbol change is transmitted to the effect control device 313 as soon as possible, the lottery process is not processed in one loop but a plurality of times. Divide into loops, and draw a lottery for the notice effect that appears immediately after the start of the symbol change in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, a lamp, a motor, or a solenoid, the operation is executed (S550), the command stored in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if immediately after the command analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Return (Y of S554), if it is not immediately after command analysis (N of S554), the lottery software random number is updated as a low priority process that may be performed in free time (S556), and the process returns to S536. In S552, when the command to be analyzed shows the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol is determined by the processing of this S552, and when the command to be analyzed indicates the stop symbol of the special symbol, the lottery sheet is displayed. If the method is used to determine the out-of-order symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined by the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is a priority level 7 interrupt command having the highest priority next to the reset interrupt and the error interrupt. The data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in a row, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y of S600), and the confirmed command is the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is saved in the temporary storage area (S604). The hard random number is acquired for the subsequent processing (S606), and the original routine is returned. By acquiring a hard random number each time a main command is interrupted from the main board 200 in this way, the randomness of the value is enhanced without causing periodicity in the random number acquisition timing. If the data read in S600 does not match twice in a row (up to 5 times can be read), S602 is skipped and the original routine is returned (N in S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), and if it can be confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command buffer (command data). The command write pointer which is the read position in the ring buffer) is acquired (S610), and the first command and the second command are saved in the command buffer (S612). The command data stored in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command light pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned. If the first command has not been received in S608, skip S610 and later (N in S608) and return to the original routine.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command related to the effect display from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and is generated in a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y of S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data is transmitted to the control CPU 320 up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives a command indicating that the command data has been normally received on the control CPU 320 side. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628), and the original routine is returned. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N in S622), skip S624 and subsequent steps and return to the original routine.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command received by the sub CPU 310 from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been normally received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is an interrupt for lamp control such as a decorative lamp 111, control of a solenoid or a motor for driving a movable accessory 66, and management control of various timers, and is generated in a cycle of 1 ms. Since it is the interrupt of priority level 1 with the lowest priority, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and a signal indicating input from the effect button 109, a signal indicating error detection, and a signal indicating power failure , Processes the input / output of ports that input / output drive signals to controlled devices such as motors and solenoids (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating a power failure is input, the backup process is immediately started. Update the data related to device control such as count processing based on the control pattern of devices such as motors and solenoids and on / off control of the buffer for writing data to the port in S642 (S644), and set a timer to measure the timing of the effect. Update (S646), update the timer for managing the input valid time of the effect button 109 (S648), and update the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 and runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. To create a 16 ms cycle (S650).

The minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of the image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integral multiple thereof as the minimum unit of the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, it is possible to easily synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Further, when counting a relatively long period such as an error notification for 30 seconds, if a count with a 10 interrupt (1 ms) cycle is used, the count value becomes longer than necessary, but 16 ms. The count value can be shortened by using the count value of the cycle.

There are 16 types of tasks from processes 0 to 15 in the task control, one of which is the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, and two tasks are the runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is executed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter to realize switching in a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processes 0 and 8, and when the count values of the task control counters are 0 and 8, that is, once every 80 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring is realized in a cycle of 8 ms.

A toggle signal that is on / off inverted for each frame is output from the control CPU 320, and if this toggle signal does not change continuously at the same value for 1600 ms, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 is used. Sends a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that receives the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 in a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), it is monitored in a cycle of 8 ms shorter than that cycle. Finally, a timer for managing a relatively long error notification period such as an error notification for 30 seconds as described above is subtracted (S654), and the error notification ends at the time-out.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the special symbol variation. When the second winning / failing lottery value is reserved (Y of S700), the second winning / failing determination means 222 reads the second winning / failing lottery value and determines whether or not the second special symbol 52 is correct (S702), and the second winning / failing is determined. The determination means 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and issues a variation start command together with the determined result. It is transmitted to the sub-board 300 and the symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 is started (S716).

When the second winning / failing lottery value is not held (N of S700) and the first winning / failing lottery value is held (Y of S708), the first winning / failing determination means 221 is the first winning / failing lottery. The value is read out and the hit / fail of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first hit / miss determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determination means 231 is the first. 1 The variation pattern of the special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and the variation start command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 together with the determined result to start the symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first winning / failing lottery value is not held, the processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

The symbol variation display of the special symbol is processed (S718), S718 is repeated until the predetermined variation time elapses and the symbol display stop timing is reached (N of S720), and the symbol display is stopped after the predetermined variation time elapses. When the timing is reached (Y of S720), the fluctuation stop command is sent to the sub-board 300 to stop the symbol fluctuation being displayed at the predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is terminated. do.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying decorative symbol variation. The effect determining means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the start of variation and the display content of the effect from the main board 200 (S750), and stops the decorative symbol according to the received stop symbol, variation pattern, and pass / fail determination result of the special symbol. The aspect is determined (S752), and the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, when the precursor setting is turned on by the preliminary determination (Y of S756), the already determined variation effect pattern includes a specific effect content that should be avoided from being superimposed on the advance notice effect. If this is not the case (N of S758) and the symbol change is not the trigger for turning on the precursor setting (N of S760), the setting to display the predetermined advance notice effect is executed (S764), and the precursor setting is set. If it is a symbol change that is an on trigger (Y of S760), the precursor setting is turned off (S762). If the precursor setting is not on (N in S756) or if the variable staging pattern contains a specific staging content (Y in S758), the processes from S760 to S764 are skipped.

After that, the variation effect display of the decorative symbol is started (S766), the variation effect display process of the decorative symbol (S768), the display process of the notice effect is executed (S770), and the variation stop command is received from the main board 200. When S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772) and the fluctuation stop command is received (Y in S772), the symbol variation display is stopped by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774). ), The variable effect of the decorative pattern is finished (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect process of the special game (S800), and the open / close control means 275 opens the large winning opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N of S804) and the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the game returns to S804 (N of S806) and the predetermined opening time has elapsed (N of S806). Although the opening time has not passed (Y of S804) (N of S804), when the number of balls entered into the large winning opening 20 reaches 9 or more (Y of S806), the open / close control means 275 is the large winning opening. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), 1 is added to the number of rounds to return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect display is displayed. The control means 305 ends the special game effect process (S814), the special game control means 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts executing the specific game, that is, the probability change, the time saving, and the easy-to-enter state (S818). ).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process of the small hit game. In the small hit game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the large winning opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time elapses (N of S822). When the time has passed (Y of S822), the large winning opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the opening and closing for the set number of times has not been completed (N of S826), 1 is added to the number of opening and closing to return to S820. (S828) If the opening and closing for the set number of times is completed (Y in S8286), the small hit game is terminated.

In the prerequisite technique, the number of big hits in the second game is generally larger than the number of big hits in the first game, that is, the second game has one big hit than the first game. Although it was designed to have a higher expected value of winning a prize ball in, in another example, the first game may be designed to have a higher expected value of winning a prize ball than the second game. However, the first game and the second game may be designed so that the expected value of winning a prize ball is substantially equal to each other. In the latter case, the special game executed in the first game may be designed so that the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the second game is equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which a unit game is executed seven times with a probability of 100% is executed, and in a second game, a special game in which a unit game is executed four times with a probability of 50% is executed. However, there may be a special game in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 50%. Further, in any case, a specific area is provided in the large winning opening, and when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game is completed. It may be configured so that a specific game such as a probabilistic state is performed. In this case, the special game executed when the big hit is made in the second game is easier to enter the specific area than the special game executed when the big hit is made in the first game. It may be configured so that the probability that the normal game in the probable change state is executed after the end of the special game is high. For example, the first hit in which a special game in which it is relatively difficult to enter a specific area is executed, and the second hit in which a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area is executed. It may be provided so that the second game has a higher probability of being a second hit than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of a second hit in the first game may be less than 100%, but the probability of a second hit in the second game may be configured to be 100%.

(Example)
In this embodiment, we propose suitable control and effect in a pachinko gaming machine provided with a screen deformation effect as a special effect. Hereinafter, the same or corresponding elements as those constituting the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the prerequisite technique will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the contents already explained in the prerequisite technique will be omitted as appropriate, and the contents different from the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the prerequisite technique will be mainly described.

<Special production>
As a special effect in this embodiment, a screen deformation effect will be described. The screen transformation effect referred to here adds transformations such as enlargement, reduction, movement, distortion, fluctuation, color inversion, and color conversion to the frame image included in the displayed image together with the frame image arranged around the frame image. It is a production. To transform the frame image, when one frame image included in the original video is sequentially transformed (also called "still effect in the frame"), multiple frame images included in the original video are transformed. There is a case where deformation is sequentially applied to each (also referred to as "in-frame video production"). The in-frame still effect is such that the original image that was being displayed is still, and the frame image at the time of the stillness is deformed so that the so-called screen capture image is fitted into the frame image as a still image and deformed. It is a production. The in-frame moving image effect is an effect in which the original image is fitted into the frame image as it is as a moving image and deformed by modifying each frame image of the image being displayed. The frame image of the original video is temporarily stored in the frame buffer, and new frame images are sequentially generated by adding transformations such as enlargement, reduction, movement, distortion, rocking, color inversion, and color conversion to the frame image. By storing it in the frame buffer, a new moving image as a screen deformation effect is displayed. In this way, by dynamically generating the transformed image for one scene of the moving image, the transformed frame image corresponding to a large number of scenes in a plurality of moving images is prepared in advance. It is not necessary, and it is possible to diversify the production while suppressing the increase in the amount of data and the processing load.

First, the screen before the execution of the screen deformation effect will be described.
FIG. 30 shows a screen example of the effect display device 60. FIG. 30A shows a state in which the fluctuation is stopped. On the effect screen 500 of the effect display device 60, the normal decorative symbol 502 is vertically varied and displayed as the decorative symbol 61 using most of the substantially central area, and the simple decorative symbol 504 as the decorative symbol 61 is vertically varied in the upper right corner. It is displayed variable in. As described above, the decorative symbol 61 of the present embodiment is configured to include the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simple decorative symbol 504. The normal decorative symbol 502 is composed of a first normal decorative symbol 502a which is a left symbol, a second ordinary decorative symbol 502b which is a middle symbol, and a third ordinary decorative symbol 502c which is a right symbol.

As the reserved image, the normal reserved image 506 and the simple reserved image 507 are displayed. At the bottom of the effect screen 500, a normal hold image 506 showing the number of hold numbers of the lottery value up to a maximum of 4 is displayed. In the figure, the first normal hold image 506a, the second normal hold image 506b, the third normal hold image 506c, and the fourth normal hold image 506d are arranged according to the ball entry order (that is, the order in which the fluctuation is started) from left to right. They are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. The first normal hold image 506a, the second normal hold image 506b, the third normal hold image 506c, and the fourth normal hold image 506d are usually displayed as images imitating a ball lit in a predetermined color (for example, blue). When it is determined that the jackpot expectation is high based on the so-called look-ahead at the time of entering the ball, that is, the preliminary judgment information of the lottery value corresponding to each hold, each hold image is lit in a color corresponding to the high hit expectation. Display an image that imitates a ball. In the example of FIG. 30A, only the third normal hold image 506c is displayed as an image imitating a ball that lights up in a color different from blue (for example, red). The effect of lighting in a color different from blue by pre-reading in this way is the pre-reading advance notice effect in this embodiment. For example, the staging determination means 303 suggests that the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the normal color "blue" is the lowest, and the jackpot expectation degree is higher in the order of "green", "red", and "rainbow color". Usually determines the color of the reserved image 506. The number and color (or pattern) of these reserved images indicate to the player the number of reserved images and the expected degree of jackpot. Third, the symbol variation corresponding to the third normal reserved image 506c, which is scheduled to start the symbol variation, is the symbol variation that is the target of the look-ahead (the execution trigger of the look-ahead notice effect), and is also referred to as "target variation" below.

In the right corner of the effect screen 500, a simple hold image 507, which is a hold image smaller and simplified than the normal hold image 506, is displayed. The simple hold image 507 is an image showing the number of the displayed normal hold images 506 by a number, and the number “4” is displayed in FIG. 30 (a).

FIG. 30B shows a state in which the symbol variation is displayed. FIG. 30 (b) shows a state in which the fluctuation is displayed after the symbol change starts following the state of FIG. 30 (a), and four images from the first normal hold image 506a to the fourth normal hold image 506d in FIG. 30 (a). The normal hold image 506 of the above is moved to the left by one hold image from each position. The first normal hold image 506a of FIG. 30A moves to the left and is displayed as a changing image 508. The changing image 508 is an image showing a lottery value that is currently changing the symbol, has a larger diameter than the normal holding image 506, displays a background pattern around it, and is being distinguished from the normal holding image 506 and is changing the symbol. Is emphasized. It should be noted that the changing image 508 and the normal holding image 506 are not separate image data, but common image data. Specifically, the image data includes only the image data of the changing image 508, and the normally reserved image 506 is displayed by reducing the image data of the changing image 508. The second normal hold image 506b, the third normal hold image 506c, and the fourth normal hold image 506d in FIG. 30A move to the left one by one, and the first normal hold image 506a, the second normal hold image 506b, and the second normal hold image 506d. 3 Normally, the reserved image is 506c. The first normal decorative symbol 502a is displayed in a state of temporary stop after finishing the variable display, that is, in a state of being substantially stopped but finely oscillating and the stop is not confirmed. The second normal decorative symbol 502b is changing at high speed rotation. The third normal decorative symbol 502c is in a state of fluctuating at a low speed to reach a stop after high-speed rotation. The simple decorative symbol 504 is rotating at high speed, and when all of the first normal decorative symbol 502a, the second normal decorative symbol 502b, and the third normal decorative symbol 502c are stopped (fixed stop), the simple decorative symbol 504 is also stopped (fixed). It will be stopped). Note that the fixed stop refers to a stop mode in which fine swings are not performed and fine movements are not made, unlike temporary stops. However, when the normal decorative symbol 502 is composed of numbers (or letters or symbols) and a pattern on which a person or animal character is drawn, and the simple decorative symbol 504 is composed of only numbers (or letters or symbols). , The number (or character or symbol) which is the simple decorative symbol 504 is not a temporary stop but only a fixed stop, and at the time of the fixed stop, fine rocking is not performed and it is not a slight movement. On the other hand, the normal decorative symbol 502 can be temporarily stopped, and when the temporary stop is performed, the numbers (or letters and symbols) and the patterns are finely shaken, and when the fixed stop is performed, the numbers (or letters and symbols) are also displayed. The pattern is not shaken finely and does not make a slight movement, but after a predetermined time has passed (for example, 5 seconds) from the fixed stop, at least one of the numbers (or letters and symbols) or the pattern is at the fixed stop. Even fine swings are performed.

The simple hold image 507 displayed in the right corner of the effect screen 500 is an image showing the number of the displayed normal hold images 506 numerically, and the number “3” is displayed in FIG. 30 (b). The movable accessory 520 is a movable decorative lamp in which the logo of the model title of this gaming machine is imitated, and it suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high by being operated at a predetermined timing. Although the details will be described later, a plurality of movable accessories in this embodiment are provided in addition to the movable accessories 520.

FIG. 31 schematically shows an example of shrinkage of a frame image in a screen deformation effect. FIG. 31A shows a state in which the enemy character 512 appears at a predetermined timing in a predetermined symbol variation effect such as a super reach effect with a story of fighting with the enemy character 512 as a motif. As shown in FIG. 31, it is preferable to hide the normally reserved image 506 and the changing image 508 during the execution of such a predetermined symbol variation effect (super reach effect), but the variation In the medium image 508, the display may be continued even while the normally reserved image 506 is being hidden. For example, when the super reach effect is developed, the reserved image 506 is normally hidden, but the changing image 508 is configured to be displayed during at least a part of the execution period of the super reach effect (for example, the first half period). You may. Further, during the execution of such a predetermined symbol variation effect (super reach effect, etc.), as shown in FIG. 31, the decorative symbol 502 is normally hidden, but the display mode is reduced (or a number). In the case of a normal decorative symbol 502 composed of and a symbol, the display may be continued (as only numbers). For example, when developed into a super reach effect, the decorative symbol 502 is usually configured to be displayed in a reach mode in a small and / or number only for at least a part of the execution period of the super reach effect (for example, the first half period). You may. Here, when executing the in-frame still effect as the screen deformation effect, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the image of the enemy character 512 that has been displayed on the screen until then is stopped as shown in FIG. 31 (a). The still frame image is reduced to a smaller size, and a frame image 510 like a frame, which has not been displayed until then, is displayed around the reduced frame image. Although not shown in particular when executing an in-frame video effect as a screen transformation effect, transformation processing such as sequential reduction is performed on each of a plurality of frame images included in the original video as in the case of the in-frame still effect. A plurality of frame images are also included in the scope of transformation unless otherwise specified below. At least a part of the frame image 510 may be displayed in advance (for example, a part of the area near the inside of the frame image 510 may be displayed). The inside of the frame image 510 is hereinafter referred to as an in-frame image 514. Here, the frame image 510 that was not displayed on the effect screen 500 in the state of FIG. 31 (a) is displayed around the frame image 514 in the state of FIG. 31 (b). Although the display control process itself is actually executed by the effect display control means 305 even at the time of FIG. 31A, the portion of the frame image 510 is arranged at a position corresponding to the outside of the frame of the effect screen 500. It is an image portion that is not displayed in the effect screen 500 and is not visualized because it is a portion that has been formed. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, all of the frame image 510 is visualized, but only the upper part of the frame image 510 is visualized (that is, the other parts are invisible). Alternatively, only the left and right parts of the frame image 510 may be visualized (that is, the upper and lower parts may be invisible).

Here, the frame image 514 in which the frame image of FIG. 31 (a) is reduced does not include the simple decorative symbol 504 and the simple hold image 507. That is, the simple decorative symbol 504 and the simple hold image 507 are not the target of the screen deformation effect, and are displayed on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the screen deformation effect is displayed. The normal decorative symbol 502, the normal hold image 506, and the changing image 508, which were displayed at the stage of FIG. 30, are switched to the non-display state, are not included in the target of deformation, and are not included in the in-frame image 514. That is, while the normal decorative symbol 502 is hidden, the display of the simple decorative symbol 504 is continued to secure the display of the decorative symbol (it is possible to recognize whether or not it is changing), and the normal reserved image 506 and the normal decorative symbol 506 and While the changing image 508 is hidden, the display of the simple hold image 507 is continued to guarantee the display of the hold image (whether or not there is a hold and how many holds are recognizable). Yes). In the modified example, the normal decorative symbol 502 and the changing image 508 may also be included in the frame image 514 as targets for deformation. That is, as described above, when the normal decorative symbol 502 and the changing image 508 are configured to continue to be displayed even in a predetermined symbol variation effect (super reach effect, etc.), the normal decorative symbol 502 and the changing image 508 are within the frame. It may be included in the image 514 and used as a target for screen deformation effect. Further, the normal hold image 506 is also configured to be continuously displayed by a predetermined symbol variation effect (super reach effect, etc.), and is included in the frame image 514 like the normal decorative symbol 502 and the changing image 508 to deform the screen. It may be the target of production. The in-frame image 514 is an image in which the frame image in FIG. 31 (a) is reduced as described above, and in addition, the color is inverted (also referred to as “negative / positive inversion”). Since the in-frame image 514 and the frame image 510 are objects to be subjected to the subsequent transformation processing, they are referred to as target objects 516.

FIG. 32 schematically shows an example of fluctuation of the frame image in the screen deformation effect. The target object 516 is further reduced from the state shown in FIG. 31 (b), and then the object that has been changed two-dimensionally up to that point is further changed in the depth direction to be deformed three-dimensionally. As a result, the target object 516 is a frame image of the moving image that was displayed until just before on one surface of the three-dimensional object (in the case of a still effect within the frame, an image such as a captured image in which the moving image of the effect is stopped). Yes, if it is an in-frame video effect, the image will look like a pasted or projected frame image) that switches one after another. The target object 516 has a shape in which the in-frame image 514 is arranged inside the curved frame image 510 as shown in the figure, and is not a strict rectangle. However, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the target object 516 is a rectangle. The left end side is referred to as the left side, the right end side is referred to as the right side, the upper end side is referred to as the upper side, and the lower end side is referred to as the lower side. In FIG. 32 (a), the left side of the target object 516 is moved to the front side, and the four-vertex transformation is executed to make it appear that the right side is moved to the back side. That is, the left side is lengthened, the right side is shortened, the internal angles above and below the left side are made smaller than the right angle, and the internal angles above and below the right side are made larger than the right angle to form a trapezoid. In FIG. 32 (b), the right side of the target object 516 is moved to the front side, and the four-vertex transformation is executed to make it appear that the left side is moved to the back side. That is, the right side is lengthened, the left side is shortened, the internal angles above and below the right side are smaller than the right angle, and the internal angles above and below the left side are larger than the right angle. By alternately repeating the states of FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b) at high speed, the left side and the right side can be alternately reciprocated in the front-rear direction to make the target object 516 appear to shake.

<First aspect>
(Characteristic 1) The effect determining means 303 determines whether or not to execute the screen deformation effect as the effect content to be displayed on the effect screen 500 of the effect display device 60 according to the fluctuation pattern. The screen deformation effect is a new frame image obtained by at least synthesizing an image of the target object 516 in which the frame image stored in the frame buffer 338 at a predetermined timing is deformed, a background image 518, and an image showing a game situation. Are sequentially generated and stored in the frame buffer 338, so that they are displayed as a moving image. Here, the background image 518 is all black (painted in black), but the display is not limited to such a display mode, and for example, a display in which the characters "CHANGE" flow like a telop in a loop. It may be an embodiment.

FIG. 33 schematically shows the layer structure of the effect screen 500 in the screen deformation effect. The layer structure of the effect screen 500 is composed of an error display layer 521, a volume light amount display layer 522, a game status layer 523, an effect layer 524, and a background layer 525 in this order from the frontmost surface to the rearmost surface. On the foremost error display layer 521, an error warning image 536 indicating that an error has occurred when an error has occurred, the type of error, and the like is displayed. In the next layer, the volume light amount display layer 522, a volume setting image 532 showing an interface for adjusting the volume by the player and a light amount setting image 534 showing the interface for adjusting the light amount by the player are displayed. To.

The next layer, the game status layer 523, displays images such as a simple decorative pattern 504, a simple hold image 507, a changing image 508, and a guidance display 530 that guides right-handed striking, and the display contents are constantly updated. .. As a modification, the changing image 508 may be displayed on the effect layer 524 instead of the game status layer 523. The next layer, the effect layer 524, is a layer on which the fluctuation of the normal decorative symbol 502, the normal hold image 506, and the target object 516 are mainly displayed. The shape, color, and display position of the target object 516 are constantly updated, but the content of the frame image 514 included in the target object 516 is subject to changes such as deformation and movement in the case of a stationary effect such as screen capture. Unless otherwise, the content is fixed, and in the case of an effect in which a moving image is fitted into the frame image 514, the frame images included in the original video are sequentially fitted. The normal decorative symbol 502 and the normal hold image 506 may be the target of deformation as a part of the target object 516 in the screen deformation effect. Further, as described above, when the changing image 508 is displayed on the effect layer 524 instead of the game status layer 523, the changing image 508 is also deformed as a part of the target object 516 in the screen deformation effect. It may be a target. The background layer 525 on the rearmost surface is a black background image 518. By displaying the background image 518 on the background layer 525, it can be made to look like a three-dimensional space with a sense of depth, and the target object 516 displayed on the staging layer 524 can also be made to look three-dimensional. As the effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device 60, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included. A special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined mode and a second image not deformed into a predetermined mode are displayed. The first image group refers to an image constituting the transformation target effect described later, that is, a collection of images categorized into the image to be the transformation process, and the second image group refers to the transformation target effect described later. It refers to an image other than the constituent images, that is, a collection of images categorized into images that are not the target of transformation processing. The first image is an image that can be a target of deformation in the screen deformation effect, and is an image that can be displayed on the effect layer 524. The first image group includes, for example, the target object 516 as the first image, and may further include a normal decorative symbol 502 and a normal reserved image 506. The second image is an image that is not a target of deformation in the screen deformation effect, and is an image displayed on a layer other than the effect layer 524. The second image group includes, for example, a simple decorative symbol 504, a simple hold image 507, a changing image 508, and a guidance display 530 as the second image. The special first image is, for example, the deformed target object 516, and when the normal decorative symbol 502 or the normal hold image 506 is the target of the transformation in the screen deformation effect, the deformed normal decorative symbol 502 or the deformed normal hold is used. Image 506 may be further included.

(Characteristic 2) The effect determining means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of variable effect patterns as the variable effect pattern. The plurality of types of variable effect patterns include a variable effect pattern that is an execution target of the screen deformation effect in the effect process and a variable effect pattern that is not an execution target of the screen deformation effect. The variable effect pattern to be executed of the screen transformation effect may be defined so that the screen transformation effect may or may not be executed according to a separate lottery result, or the screen transformation effect is always executed. It may be defined to be. As a result, even if the same variable effect pattern or the progress of the same effect is performed halfway, the appearance of the effect can be different depending on whether the screen deformation effect is executed or not from the middle. .. For example, in the case of a production flow that develops into a super reach effect, an effect such as "start of fluctuation-> formation of reach state-> development of super reach effect-> no screen deformation effect occurs during super reach effect-> end of super reach effect-> end of change". It can be either the flow or the flow of the effect such as "start of fluctuation-> formation of reach state-> development of super reach effect-> occurrence of screen deformation effect during super reach effect-> end of super reach effect-> end of change".

The effect determining means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of advance notice effect patterns as the advance notice effect pattern. For multiple types of advance notice effect patterns, the advance notice effect that is the target of screen deformation effect in the effect process (for example, in addition to the effect of stopping the enemy character during the above-mentioned super reach effect, before the reach state is reached. A step-up notice effect that is a part of the notice effect and a notice effect that is not the execution target of the screen deformation effect (for example, a part of the notice effect before the reach state and the normal decorative symbol 502 is temporarily stopped. A notice effect pattern in which a special normal decorative pattern 502 (for example, a normal decorative pattern 502 with the characters "NEXT") displayed at the time of a pseudo-continuous effect that changes again in is displayed, the above-mentioned super reach. This includes a notice effect pattern in which the movable accessory 520 is driven after the effect of stopping the enemy character being produced is completed, and the screen is displayed in rainbow colors accordingly). The advance notice effect to be executed may be defined so that the screen transformation effect may or may not be executed according to a separate lottery result, or the screen transformation effect is always executed. May be defined as. As a result, even with the same advance notice effect pattern, it is possible to make the appearance of the effect different depending on whether the screen deformation effect is executed or not. In addition, the effect that is the execution target of the screen deformation effect, that is, the symbol variation effect and the advance notice effect in which the screen deformation effect can be executed in the effect process is hereinafter referred to as "transformation target effect".

(Characteristic 3) The effect determining means 303 suggests in advance a high degree of expectation that the judgment result of the winning / failing lottery will be a hit, triggered by the occurrence of a hold corresponding to a new ball entering the starting port, so-called look-ahead. Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect is determined according to the information of the prior determination (prior information transmitted from the main board 200 as the main control device when a new ball is entered). Further, the degree of expectation that the screen deformation effect is executed differs depending on the mode of the advance notice effect (pre-reading advance notice). That is, when the hold related to the target change is a hold related to a change in which the screen deformation effect is scheduled to be executed, or a hold related to a change having a high probability that the screen deformation effect is executed (more specifically, it is a hold related to the change). If the advance notice effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect is on hold related to the execution of the change), the look-ahead notice with a higher expectation is higher than if it is not such a hold (if it is a hold change effect described later, it is blue. The red normal hold image 506 is configured to execute the pre-reading notice with a higher expectation than the normal hold image 506). In the case of such a configuration, even if the same effect pattern is used, it is preferable to configure the screen deformation effect so that the jackpot expectation is higher when the screen deformation effect is executed than when the screen deformation effect is not executed. , The effect of making the enemy character stand still during the above-mentioned super reach effect (screen transformation effect is executed) does not execute the effect of making the enemy character stand still during the super reach effect (screen transformation effect is executed). It is preferable to configure it so that the expectation of a big hit is higher than that (the enemy character does not stand still). The advance notice effect by pre-reading is, for example, an effect (hold change effect) that suggests a big hit expectation or an execution expectation of a screen deformation effect by the lighting color of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the target change targeted for pre-reading, as shown in FIG. ). Thereby, the ease of executing the screen deformation effect can be made different depending on the type of the advance notice effect, that is, the lighting color of the normal hold image 506. For example, the display of the red normal hold image 506 (for example, the jackpot expectation of 50%) is larger than the blue normal hold image 506 (for example, the jackpot expectation of 10%) in the target fluctuation that is the target of the look-ahead. Screen deformation effect is easy to execute. Such a hold change effect may be executed not only as the normal hold image 506 but also as the changing image 508. For example, when the first normal hold image 506a moves to become the changing image 508, (1). The first normal hold image 506a displays the blue normal hold image 506, and the changing image 508 also displays the blue normal hold image 506 (to be exact, the blue changing image 508), whereby the current fluctuation is displayed. It can be understood that the jackpot expectation is 10%, and (2) the blue normal hold image 506 is displayed in the first normal hold image 506a, and the red normal hold image 506 (to be exact, in the changing image 508). By displaying the red changing image 508), it can be understood that the jackpot expectation of the current fluctuation has increased from 10% to 50%. When the variation effect pattern to be executed is selected, whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed is determined at the start of the symbol variation due to the variation effect pattern, and the look-ahead executed by the start of the variation is determined. The execution probability of the screen deformation effect differs depending on the type of notice. As a modification, at the time when the look-ahead notice is executed (when the execution of the look-ahead notice is decided), whether or not to execute the screen deformation effect is determined by the change (target change) that triggered the execution of the look-ahead notice. You may.

(Characteristic 4) The degree of expectation that the screen deformation effect is executed differs depending on the mode of the advance notice effect of the change. The fluctuation referred to here means the current fluctuation, and when the look-ahead notice is executed, it is the change (target change) that triggered the execution of the look-ahead notice, and the look-ahead notice is executed. It is not the fluctuation that is being executed (the fluctuation before the target). Further, the mode of the advance notice effect of the change referred to here is an aspect of the advance notice effect (excluding the screen deformation effect) executed in the change in which the advance notice effect to be executed of the screen deformation effect is executed, and is a look-ahead advance notice. It should be added that it is not an aspect of the advance notice effect, that is, it is not an aspect of the advance notice effect in the variation prior to the variation in which the advance notice effect to be executed of the screen deformation effect is executed. It should be noted that whether or not the notice effect of the change is executed, its mode, whether or not the notice effect that is the target of executing the screen deformation effect, and whether or not the screen deformation effect is executed are all determined by a separate lottery at the start of the change. .. As described above, even when the variable effect pattern that is the execution target of the screen transformation effect is selected, the screen transformation effect is not always executed. For example, as a mode of the advance notice effect of the change, a line advance notice effect which is an effect of displaying the lines of the appearing character in the form of a balloon (this line advance notice effect is a advance notice effect which is the execution target of the screen deformation effect in the change. It is expected that the screen deformation effect will be executed if the balloon has a giraffe pattern (a display mode with a higher expectation of a big hit than blue) than when the color of the balloon is blue. It may be configured to have a high degree. As a modification, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect of the change, its mode, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect to be executed, and whether or not to execute the screen deformation effect are collectively determined by the same lottery at the start of the change. You may.

Depending on whether or not the screen deformation effect is executed, the appearance of the effect can be different even if the progress of the effect is the same. In addition, the combination of the effect content of the pre-reading notice executed in advance and the effect content of the target change can make the expectation regarding the difference in the presentation of the effect stepwise. The above-mentioned hold change effect and dialogue advance notice effect can be executed for both the target change and the change before the target. For example, the screen deformation effect is executed by displaying the red normal hold image 506 in the look-ahead notice. After making it look like the expectation is high, it is possible to make it look like the execution expectation of the screen deformation effect is low by displaying the blue dialogue balloon in the effect of the target fluctuation. Also, for example, after displaying the blue normal hold image 506 in the look-ahead notice to make it appear that the execution expectation of the screen deformation effect is low, the screen is deformed by displaying the dialogue balloon of the giraffe pattern in the target fluctuation effect. It can be seen that the degree of expectation for the execution of the production has increased. In the modification example, a series of processes from the start of execution of the look-ahead notice (change before the target) to the target change, or a series of processes from the look-ahead notice to the execution timing of the screen deformation effect in the target change are collectively determined. When the specifications are used, it is possible to prevent the execution expectation of the screen deformation effect from being hindered in the middle.

<Second aspect>
FIG. 34 schematically shows the process of the movable accessory effect that is executed in parallel with the screen deformation effect. FIG. 34 (a) shows an initial stage of the operation of the movable accessory 520, and FIG. 34 (b) shows a state in which the movable accessory 520 is operated. The movable accessory 520 in this embodiment includes a first movable accessory 520a, a second movable accessory 520b, a third movable accessory 520c, and a fourth movable accessory 520d. The first movable accessory 520a is a movable decorative lamp in which the logo of the model title of this gaming machine is imitated, and falls downward as shown in FIG. 34 (b) at a predetermined timing during a predetermined production. By moving a lot, it suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high. The second movable accessory 520b and the third movable accessory 520c are scissor arm type decorative members, and the second movable accessory 520b is the effect screen 500 from the left side of the effect screen 500 as shown in FIG. 34 (b). By extending to the center and operating so that the third movable accessory 520c extends from the right side of the effect screen 500 to the center of the effect screen 500, it suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high. The fourth movable accessory 520d is a mountain-shaped decorative lamp like a saw blade, and by moving greatly upward as shown in FIG. 34 (b) at a predetermined timing during a predetermined production. , Suggests that the expectation for big hits is high. As shown in FIG. 34 (b), in the simple decorative symbol 504 and the simple hold image 507, the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory 520d are all included. It is displayed in a position where visibility is not obstructed even in the operating state. It should be noted that, at the time of the fluctuation stop and the predetermined time until the fluctuation stop (for example, the period from 2 seconds before the fluctuation stop to the fluctuation stop), none of the movable accessories operate, that is, the movable accessory is configured to be in the initial position. At least at the boundary of the game (that is, the situation where the game progress is temporarily stopped), it is possible to guarantee more reliable visibility. As a modification, the simple decorative symbol 504 and the simple hold image 507 are at least one of the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory 520d. It may be configured to be displayed at a position where visibility is not hindered when the movable accessory is operated. For example, the simple decorative symbol 504 and the simple hold image 507 are displayed at a position where the visibility is hindered when the third movable accessory 520c is operated, but the visibility is not hindered when the other movable accessory is operated. However, in such a configuration, the frequency at which the third movable accessory 520c operates is such that any one of the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, and the fourth movable accessory 520d operates. It is preferable that the frequency is lower than the frequency, and it is also preferable that the time during which the third movable accessory 520c operates within one fluctuation is shorter than the time during which the third movable accessory 520c does not operate. be. In such a configuration, in all fluctuation patterns (variation time), the time during which the third movable accessory 520c operates within one fluctuation is shorter than the time during which the third movable accessory 520c does not operate. It is more preferable to do so.

(Characteristic 5) The movable accessory 520 is provided in the vicinity of the effect display device 60, and operates in an effect manner in conjunction with the effect displayed on the effect display device 60. The presence / absence of the operation of the movable accessory 520 and the presence / absence of the execution of the screen transformation effect are associated with each other so that the display of the screen deformation effect and the operation of the movable accessory 520 are relatively often executed in parallel. .. For example, the screen transformation effect is a movable character rather than other types of effects that do not involve the screen transformation effect (for example, capture effect, inversion effect, step-up notice, dialogue notice, hold change effect, group notice, etc.). 520 is often executed in parallel. Further, for example, the screen deformation effect is more often accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory 520 than by the operation of the movable accessory 520. The effect control means 304 operates the movable accessory 520 according to the presence or absence of the operation of the movable accessory 520 determined by the effect determination means 303. By linking the screen deformation effect and the operation of the movable accessory 520 in this way, it is possible to further enhance the three-dimensional effect and the dynamic feeling of the effect content displayed on the effect display device 60 when the screen deformation effect is executed. That is, not only the movement with a three-dimensional effect and a dynamic feeling is expressed by the effect content to be displayed, but also the three-dimensional effect and the dynamic feeling are produced around the effect display device 60. On the contrary, in the screen deformation effect that does not involve the operation of the movable accessory 520, the content of the screen transformation effect itself can be further emphasized by refraining from the operation of the movable accessory 520. When the state in which the movable accessory 520 is operating is viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 34, the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory The 520d operates so as to have a position and a shape that does not impair the visibility of the simple decorative symbol 504.

(Characteristic 6) The decorative symbol includes a normal decorative symbol 502 displayed as a main symbol on the effect display device 60 at least when the special symbol is stopped, and at least a normal decorative symbol 502 when the normal decorative symbol 502 is difficult to see. A simple decorative symbol 504 displayed in a simplified display form is included. The normal decorative symbol 502 is a symbol displayed in a size larger than the simple decorative symbol 504. The normal decorative symbol 502 is composed of three symbols, and in principle, the decorative symbols 502 are stopped one by one after the variable display. The simple decorative symbol 504 is also composed of three symbols, but three of them are stopped at the same time after the variable display. As the combination of the stop symbols of the simple decorative symbol 504, the same combination as the combination of the stop symbols of the normal decorative symbol 502 is displayed.
In addition, during the execution of the super reach effect, the normal decorative symbol 502 may be configured to be displayed small (the alternative symbol is displayed) or the normal decorative symbol 502 may be hidden (the normal decorative symbol 502 may be hidden) for at least a part of the period. The alternative symbol may also be configured not to be displayed), but in such a situation, the simple decorative symbol 504 is always displayed in a variable manner. This simple decorative symbol 504 is displayed small in the upper right corner of the effect display device 60, and displays a variable display while the special symbol is fluctuating, and displays a stop while the special symbol is stopped. , As with the normal decorative symbol 502, three symbols are variable display and stop display. By providing this simple decorative symbol 504, a situation in which the normal decorative symbol 502 is desired to be made smaller or hidden (for example, when performing a super reach effect, an effect by a movable accessory is performed and the center of the effect display device 60 is used. Even if it is hidden (for example, when it is hidden), it is possible to notify that it is changing (in other words, that the result of success or failure is not confirmed). That is, it can be said that the simple decorative symbol 504 is a symbol for display security (to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 502). When the simple decorative symbol 504 is variable-displayed, it is preferable to always continue the variable display from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop display, that is, the normal decorative symbol 502 temporarily stops in the middle. Even in the case (for example, when the special normal decorative symbol 502 that displays characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when executing the pseudo-continuous effect), the simple decorative symbol 504 does not temporarily stop in the middle. (Therefore, the simple decorative symbol 504 is not provided with a special symbol for displaying characters such as "NEXT", and the simple decorative symbol 504 only stops the confirmation). , In order to prevent misunderstanding that it is a big hit in the case of an out-of-order fluctuation, and to prevent the player from being detected in advance that it is a big hit in the case of a big hit fluctuation, even if it is an out-of-order fluctuation or a big hit fluctuation, the player On the other hand, it is variablely displayed while maintaining the symbol combination indicating the deviation (for example, when the type of the simple decorative symbol 504 is "1" to "7", "123" → "234" → "345" → "456". "->" 567 "->" 671 "->" 712 "->" 123 "-> ...). Further, when the fluctuation starts from the situation where the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simple decorative symbol 504 are fixedly stopped, the symbol combination (the first symbol combination immediately after the start of the fluctuation) as the starting point is 1 from the symbol combination at the fixed stop. If the simple decorative symbol 504 starts to fluctuate from the situation where the simple decorative symbol 504 has been fixedly stopped, the symbol combination that is the starting point will be a predetermined symbol combination regardless of the combination at the time of the fixed stop. .. For example, when both the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simple decorative symbol 504 are fixedly stopped at "243" and the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simple decorative symbol 504 start to fluctuate, the normal decorative symbol 502 The symbol combination that is the starting point of is "354", but the symbol combination that is the starting point of the simple decorative symbol 504 is fixed to "123", and both the number combinations related to the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simple decorative symbol 504 are "333". When the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simple decorative symbol 504 start to fluctuate in the situation where the confirmation is stopped, the symbol combination that is the starting point of the normal decorative symbol 502 is "444", but the starting point of the simple decorative symbol 504. The symbol combination is fixed at "123". In addition to this, the simple decorative symbol 504 can be clearly differentiated from the normal decorative symbol 502 by having the following features.
(1) The display area of the normal decorative symbol 502, which is easy for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of the simple decorative symbol 504 (to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 502) for display security. This is a situation in which the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simple decorative symbol 504 are fixedly stopped, and the normal decorative symbol 502 is immediately after forming the reach state (the reach state in a state where the super reach effect has not been developed) and the simple decoration. The symbol 504 is not limited to the situation where the variable display is being performed, and even if the normal decorative symbol 502 is a small symbol during a super reach production or the like and the simple decorative symbol 504 is the situation where the simple decorative symbol 504 is being variablely displayed. It is preferable to configure it in such a manner.
(2) The display position of the normal decorative symbol 502 is in the first effect mode (for example, stage A in the normal mode or the normal mode) or in the second effect mode (for example, the stage B in the rush mode or the normal mode). By setting different display positions according to the crab, it is possible to realize a variety of effects in the normal decorative symbol 502 according to the effect mode. On the other hand, since the simple decorative symbol 504 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 502, it is unnecessary to use the same display position regardless of whether it is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. It is preferable to avoid the need for various development designs. The details of the effect mode will be described later.
(3) The display mode of the normal decorative symbol 502 is either the first effect mode (for example, stage A in the normal mode or the normal mode) or the second effect mode (for example, the stage B in the rush mode or the normal mode). By using different display modes depending on the mode, it is possible to realize a variety of effects in the normal decorative symbol 502 according to the effect mode. For example, in the first effect mode, the normal decorative symbol 502 is composed of only the number normal decorative symbols 502 (normal decorative symbols 502 such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second effect mode. The normal decorative symbol 502 of the number and the normal decorative symbol 502 of the ally character are combined to form the normal decorative symbol 502 ("1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., " 7 ”+“ Character g ”, which is a normal decorative pattern 502). On the other hand, since the simple decorative symbol 504 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 502, only the same display mode is used regardless of whether it is the first effect mode or the second effect mode. For example, it is preferable to configure the simple decorative symbol 504 with only the normal decorative symbol 502 of numbers and to avoid unnecessary development and design.
(4) The display area of the normal decorative symbol 502 is variable (moving, small symbol) according to the fluctuation situation (for example, whether or not it is in normal reach, whether or not it is in super reach effect, etc.). As a result, it is possible to give diversity to the production of the normal decorative pattern 502. On the other hand, since the simple decorative symbol 504 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 502, the display area of the simple decorative symbol 504 is not variable (does not move or is not a small symbol). It is preferable not to carry out development design.
(5) The fluctuation speed of the normal decorative symbol 502 can be changed to low speed, medium speed, high speed, ultra high speed, etc. according to the fluctuation status (for example, whether it is at the start of fluctuation, in the middle of fluctuation, or just before the end of fluctuation, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to give diversity to the production of the normal decorative pattern 502. On the other hand, since the simple decorative symbol 504 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 502, the fluctuation speed of the simple decorative symbol 504 is not variable or the stage of making it variable is reduced (for example, low speed). It is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design by (only high speed). Also, regarding the direction of fluctuation, the normal decorative symbol 502 enables not only the fluctuation from top to bottom but also the fluctuation from bottom to top (it enables fluctuation in a plurality of directions), while the simple decorative symbol 504 enables variation in multiple directions. , It is preferable to make only the fluctuation from top to bottom.
(6) The normal decorative symbol 502 is a temporary stop (temporary stop in the middle of the change of the special symbol) before the fixed stop (stop at the timing when the special symbol stops), and is provisional with a slight shaking fluctuation. (Stop), and at that time, temporarily stop a specific symbol other than the number, which is a normal decorative symbol 502 (for example, a normal decorative symbol 502 on which the character "super" foretelling the development of a super reach effect is written). As a result, it is possible to have a relationship between the effect of the normal decorative pattern 502 and other effects. On the other hand, since the simple decorative symbol 504 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 502, the simple decorative symbol 504 is not temporarily stopped, nor is the specific symbol temporarily stopped. It is preferable to avoid the need for various development designs.
(7) The normal decorative symbol 502 overlaps with the display area of other notice effects (for example, comment notice effect, step-up notice effect, etc.), that is, superimposed display is performed. In order to perform a powerful effect by using the area on the effect display device 60 as much as possible, such superimposed display is allowed, but the simple decorative symbol 504 usually plays a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative symbol 502. Therefore, it is desirable that the display area of the simple decorative symbol 504 is designed so as not to overlap with the display area of the other notice effect (do not overlap and display). However, regarding the relationship with special notice effects that are inevitably duplicated (for example, group notice effects displayed on the entire effect display device 60, background notice effects, etc.), the display priority of the simple decorative symbol 504 is set. It is preferable to set it higher than the display priority of the special notice effect (set the simple decorative symbol 504 to be displayed in front of the special notice effect). Further, the right-handed notification image (unlike the image displayed during the special game, the right-handed notification image dedicated to the high-base state displayed during the high-base state, but may be an image common to the image during the special game. ), Since it is desirable to make it visible to the player without fail, it is desirable to design so that the display area of the simple decorative symbol 504 and the display area of the right-handed notification image do not overlap (do not overlap and display). .. However, when the display area of the normal decorative symbol 502 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the normal decorative symbol 502 and the display area of the right-handed notification image may overlap (superimpose display). In that case, set the display priority of the normal decorative symbol 502 lower than the display priority of the right-handed notification image (set the normal decorative symbol 502 to be displayed on the rear side of the right-handed notification image). Is preferable.
(8) During the special game, the normal decorative symbol 502 may be displayed as only one, not as a combination display. For example, if "777" is fixedly stopped and the special game is executed, "7" is displayed during the special game, and if "222" is fixedly stopped and the special game is executed, the special game is executed. "2" is displayed during the special game. As a result, it is possible to recognize which normal decorative symbol 502 is the big hit during the special game. As a modification, only the normal decorative symbol 502 corresponding to the jackpot with high advantage (for example, "333", "555", "777" indicating that the jackpot is 7R or more or the jackpot of 10R) is in special game. It may be displayed in. In this way, the display area for displaying one normal decorative symbol 502 displayed during the special game is a round display area, a right-handed display area, a prize ball acquisition display area, and a cumulative prize, which are other display areas during the special game. It is desirable that the area does not overlap with the number of balls display area, that is, it is configured so as not to be superimposed (however, the highlighting may be superimposed, and in that case, the highlighting has a higher display priority). Further, the simple decorative symbol 504 is preferably hidden during the special game (because the variable display is not performed during the special game), but it may be displayed during the special game. When configured to, it may be configured so that it does not overlap with other display areas during the special game, such as the round display area, the right-handed display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize ball number display area, that is, it does not overlap. It is desirable, and it is desirable not to superimpose the highlighting.
(9) In the normal decorative symbol 502, in addition to the fluctuation (for example, movement from top to bottom), a predetermined operation is performed at the start of the fluctuation, immediately after the temporary stop, after the reach is established, during the temporary stop, and the like. The accompanying display may be performed (the operation in each situation may be referred to as a fluctuation start operation, a temporary stop operation, a reach establishment operation, or a shaking operation). For example, in the case of non-reach (when the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simple decorative symbol 504 are displayed as "624" when the confirmation is stopped), when the fluctuation starts, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right of the normal decorative symbol 502 are displayed. After performing an operation that expands all of the symbols, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation and then temporarily stops "6" and then shakes. After that, when the right symbol temporarily stops, a bouncing motion is performed, and then the swaying motion is continued after "4" temporarily stops, and then when the middle symbol temporarily stops. After performing a bouncing motion, "2" temporarily stops and performs a slight shaking motion, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the motions of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are terminated. In this case, the simple decorative symbol 504 does not perform any operation. Further, in the case of normal reach (when the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simple decorative symbol 504 are displayed as "212" when the confirmation is stopped), when the fluctuation starts, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the normal decorative symbol 502 are displayed. After performing an operation that all of Continue, then when the right symbol temporarily stops, perform a bouncing motion, then continue the swaying motion after "2" temporarily stops, and then left to notify that it is reach. After the symbol and the right symbol rotate, the shaking motion is continued again, and then when the middle symbol temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing motion, "1" temporarily stops and the shaking motion is slightly performed. After that, all the operations of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are terminated at the fixed stop timing (the middle symbol does not rotate). In this case, the simple decorative symbol 504 does not perform any operation. Further, in the case of developing into a super reach effect (when the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simple decorative symbol 504 are displayed as "232" when the confirmation is stopped), when the fluctuation starts, the left symbol and the middle symbol in the normal decorative symbol 502 are displayed. , After performing an action that enlarges all of the right symbol, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion and then "2" temporarily stops. The swaying motion is continued, and then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, a bouncing motion is performed, and then the swaying motion is continued after "2" is temporarily stopped, and then the reach is notified. Therefore, the left symbol and the right symbol rotate and then continue the shaking motion again, and then the middle symbol fluctuates while the left symbol and the right symbol perform the shaking motion (at this time, the middle symbol). The symbols fluctuate from top to bottom in a magnified state, and the left and right symbols that were not duplicated or had a small overlap ratio until then have overlapping or a high overlap ratio), After that, it shifts from the normal background to the reach background in order to execute the super reach effect, and when it is notified by the super reach effect that it is the result of the deviation, it shifts from the reach background to the normal background, and after the transition, left. The symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol continue to sway for a predetermined time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are terminated (the middle symbol performs both bouncing and rotating operations). not). In this case, the simple decorative symbol 504 does not perform any operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to give diversity to the production of the normal decorative symbol 502, while the simple decorative symbol 504 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 502, so that it is simple. It is preferable that the decorative design 504 is configured so as not to perform any particular operation, and it is not necessary to carry out an extra development design. Further, even between the time when the fluctuation is stopped and the time when the standby demo effect is displayed, the normal decorative symbol 502 swings after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 10 seconds after) after the fluctuation is stopped. However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the simple decorative symbol 504 does not operate at all. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the game even while the game is waiting (the symbol is stopped), and the simple decorative symbol 504 does not perform a shaking motion, so that the game is waiting. Notification can be guaranteed. In addition, when the standby demo effect is displayed, the decorative symbol 502 is normally hidden, but it is preferable that the simple decorative symbol 504 is continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to secure the display of what kind of symbol is stopped while emphasizing the display of the standby demo effect screen. However, during the standby demo production, since the game is not performed, the simple decorative symbol 504 may also be hidden. Further, among the normal decorative symbols 502, a specific symbol (for example, "7" of the middle symbol) may be configured so that the predetermined operation is not performed or the probability of performing the predetermined operation is lower than that of the other symbols. This predetermined operation may be, for example, the above-mentioned temporary stop operation (bounce-like operation) (particularly, regarding “7” of the middle symbol after the reach is established). With such a configuration, the rarity of the movement in a specific symbol can be enhanced. The normal decorative symbol 502 of the number and the normal decorative symbol 502 of the ally character are combined to form the normal decorative symbol 502 (“1” + “character a”, “2” + “character b”, ... , "7" + "character g", etc. In the case of the normal decorative symbol 502), both the numerical normal decorative symbol 502 and the ally character's normal decorative symbol 502 perform the shaking motion of the normal decorative symbol 502. However, the swing width (the swing distance, for example, if it swings up and down, the distance between the state in which the normal decorative symbol 502 during the swing operation is displayed at the top and the state in which it is displayed at the bottom). By making the width) different, it is possible to realize a dynamic swinging motion, and when configured as such, the swinging width of the normal decorative symbol 502 of the number is larger than the swinging width of the normal decorative symbol 502 of the ally character. Or, the normal decorative symbol 502 of the number may not perform the shaking operation, and only the normal decorative symbol 502 of the ally character may be configured to perform the shaking operation.

The normal decorative symbol 502 can be included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen deformation effect and can be the target of deformation, that is, can be included in the first image belonging to the first image group, and is displayed on the effect layer 524. Will be done. On the other hand, the simple decorative symbol 504 is not included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen transformation effect and is not a target of transformation, that is, is included in the second image belonging to the second image group, while the game in the screen transformation effect. It is an object that can be included in the image showing the situation, and is displayed on the game situation layer 523. It should be noted that a predetermined situation in which the screen deformation effect processing is executed including the normal decorative symbol 502 as a target (for example, a reach state is formed while the normal decorative symbol 502 is changing or temporarily stopped). In the situation where the screen deformation effect processing is being executed for the state in which the screen is being deformed, in this situation, the scroll movement of the normal decorative symbol 502 instead of the still screen and the shaking motion at the time of temporary stop and the formation of the reach state are continued. The movable accessory 520 can be operated even in the case where the image is deformed while being reproduced and displayed. When the movable accessory 520 in operation is viewed from the front, it becomes at least one of the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory 520d in operation. Therefore, the visibility of the normal decorative symbol 502 during the screen deformation effect is hindered, but as shown in FIG. 34, the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the third movable accessory are operating. In any of the 4 movable accessories 520d, the visibility of the simple decorative symbol 504 during the screen deformation effect is not impaired. As described above, it may be configured to be displayed at a position where visibility is not hindered when at least one of the movable accessories is operated. In order to give a sense of unity to the screen deformation effect, conversely, the symbol variation effect without the screen transformation effect and the normal decorative symbol 502 are configured to move in the same manner. On the other hand, in order to make it easier to understand whether or not the symbol is currently changing, and if the symbol is temporarily stopped, which symbol is temporarily stopped, the simple decorative symbol 504 is deformed by the screen deformation effect. The visibility of the simple decorative symbol 504 is ensured as a non-target. In that case, the visibility of the simple decorative symbol 504 is more reliably ensured by setting the operation of the linked movable accessory 520 in an operation mode that does not impair the visibility of the simple decorative symbol 504. The relationship between the normal decorative symbol 502 and the simple decorative symbol 504 may be applied to the relationship between the normal hold image 506 (changing image 508) and the simple hold image 507. That is, while displaying a predetermined situation (for example, the normal hold image 506 (changing image 508)) in which the screen deformation effect processing is being executed including the normal hold image 506 (changing image 508) as a target. In the situation where the screen deformation effect processing is being executed, in this situation, if the normal hold image 506 (changing image 508) is displayed with the rotation animation or the light emission animation instead of the still screen, the animation. The movable accessory 520 can be operated even in the case where the image is deformed while the image is continuously reproduced and displayed. When the movable accessory 520 in operation is viewed from the front, it becomes at least one of the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, the third movable accessory 520c, and the fourth movable accessory 520d in operation. Therefore, the visibility of the normal hold image 506 (changing image 508) during the screen deformation effect is impaired, but the first movable accessory 520a, the second movable accessory 520b, and the third movable accessory in operation are as shown in FIG. 34. In either of the movable accessory 520c and the fourth movable accessory 520d, the visibility of the simple hold image 507 during the screen deformation effect is not impaired. As described above, it may be configured to be displayed at a position where visibility is not hindered when at least one of the movable accessories is operated. In order to give a sense of unity to the screen deformation effect, conversely, the symbol variation effect without the screen transformation effect and the normal hold image 506 (changing image 508) are configured to move in the same manner. On the other hand, in order to make it easier to understand whether or not the symbol is currently changing, and if the symbol is temporarily stopped, which symbol is temporarily stopped, the simple hold image 507 is transformed by the screen deformation effect. The visibility of the simple reserved image 507 is ensured as a non-target. In that case, the visibility of the simple hold image 507 is more reliably ensured by setting the operation of the linked movable accessory 520 in an operation mode that does not impair the visibility of the simple hold image 507.

<Third aspect>
(Characteristic 7) In the screen deformation effect, the background image 518 as the second image is used in another screen transformation effect in which another image is the target of transformation, regardless of the content of the frame image as the first image to be transformed. The content is the same as the background image 518. For example, the common background image 518 in this embodiment is an image whose entire surface is all black, and is displayed on the background layer 525 in each screen deformation effect. By sharing the background image of each screen deformation effect with a black image, it is possible to suppress an increase in the display processing load and an increase in the image capacity. As described above, the background image 518 may be displayed in such a way that, for example, a moving image in which the characters "CHANGE" flow like a telop is played back in a loop.

<Fourth aspect>
(Feature 8) The effect display device 60 has a predetermined error (for example, a door opening error or a frame opening error that occurs when a door / frame opening signal is detected, a shortage of game balls, an upper ball plate 105 / lower ball). If a prize ball payout error occurs in which the prize ball payout stops when the game ball of the plate 106 is full, an error warning image 536 indicating the error (indicating the occurrence of the error and the type of error) is displayed. Will be done. Further, if the screen deformation effect is executed in a situation where the error warning image 536 is displayed due to an error occurring before the screen deformation effect is executed, the display of the error warning image 536 is continued as it is. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33, the error warning image 536 is displayed on the frontmost error display layer 521 and not on the effect layer 524, so that the target object is a frame image to be deformed. It is not included in 516 and is not deformed. As a result, not only can it be configured so as not to hinder the execution of the screen deformation effect even when an error occurs, but also the visibility of the error warning image 536 is not hindered by excluding the error warning image 536 from the screen deformation effect. Can be configured as follows. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume which is the specified volume, the volume level can be adjusted (volume adjustment) through the operation by the player in parallel, and the player can operate the error warning sound in FIG. 33. The volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume light amount display layer 522. Depending on the type of error (type of error warning sound) generated during the progress of the game, the effect sound accompanying the progress of the game (for example, the BGM of the super reach effect or the sound effect generated by the screen deformation effect) may be an error. It is configured not to be output by the priority output of the warning sound. For example, if an error occurs during the screen deformation effect and the error is a prize ball payout error, both the error warning sound and the effect sound are output (however, the error warning sound is the maximum volume which is the specified volume. So, the production sound is output at the volume corresponding to the currently set volume level), but if there is a door opening error, only the error warning sound is output and the production sound is not output (or the prize ball payout error). It is configured to output the production sound at a lower volume than when it occurs). The type of error is an example. In the case of such an error occurring during the game, even if the screen deformation effect is executed, the volume setting image 532 is also not displayed on the effect layer 524, so that the target object 516, which is the frame image to be transformed, is displayed. Is not included and is not deformed. As a result, not only can it be configured so as not to hinder the execution of volume adjustment even when an error occurs, but also the visibility of the volume setting image 532 is not hindered by excluding the volume setting image 532 from the screen deformation effect. Can be configured in. In the volume setting image 532, it is possible to display what the currently set volume level is (for example, "volume level is 1", "volume level is 5", etc. can be displayed). When the volume level is adjusted by the player's operation, the display content is changed (for example, when the volume level is changed from 1 to 2, the display of "Volume level is 1" is changed to "Volume level is 5". Switch to the display of). Here, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player operation during the execution of the screen deformation effect, and the player operation is further performed while the screen transformation effect is being executed and the volume setting image 532 is being displayed to adjust the volume. When the display change of the volume setting image 532 is performed, the volume setting image 532 (for example, "the volume level is 1" is displayed) during the screen transformation effect execution and before the display change is being executed and after the display change is performed. In any of the volume setting images 532 (for example, the display of "volume level is 2"), the images are displayed in a display mode in which the screen is not deformed. Further, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player operation immediately before the execution of the screen deformation effect, and the screen deformation effect is executed immediately after that (while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed), and the volume setting image 532 is being displayed and the screen is displayed. When the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by performing the player operation during the execution of the transformation effect, the volume setting image 532 (for example, "volume level" before the execution of the screen transformation effect and before the display change is performed. Is 1 ”) and the volume setting image 532 (for example,“ Volume level is 2 ”is displayed) after the screen transformation effect is executed and the display is changed. Will be done. To ensure visibility, it is preferable that the error warning image 536 and the volume setting image are configured so as not to be duplicated (displayed in different display areas).

<Fifth aspect>
(Feature 9) As shown in FIG. 30, the effect display device 60 displays a normal hold image 506 indicating the number of holds when the hold is stored. In addition, when a hold corresponding to a new ball entry occurs, an animation is displayed so that the hold image 506 is not displayed suddenly but gradually to indicate that the hold has occurred (details will be described later). Is displayed, and the screen is displayed during the animation display of the normal hold image 506, that is, from the start to the completion of the animation of the normal hold image 506 (until the display of the normal hold image 506 is completed). Even if the transformation effect is executed, the animation display is not stopped. The animation display of the normal hold image 506 referred to here is not only the animation display at the time of the normal hold occurrence (at the time of the hold occurrence without the look-ahead notice), but also when changing the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 as a look-ahead notice effect. Also includes an animation display that is performed on (for example, an animation in which the color of the normal hold image 506 glows white when the hold occurs, and then the color changes, and a small character appears and the normal hold image 506 that is being displayed is magically colored. Changing animation etc.). However, during the execution of the screen deformation effect, or during the fluctuation to execute the screen deformation effect (the situation where the screen deformation effect is scheduled to be executed due to the change but the execution timing has not been reached), the screen deformation effect is used. In order to attract attention, if the pre-reading notice is not executed (no lottery or decision is made) even if there is a new ball, or if the animation display effect at the time of normal hold occurrence is not executed, the screen deformation effect will be displayed. The specification that does not stop the animation display when it is executed is adopted only for the animation display at the time of normal hold occurrence (at the time of hold occurrence without pre-reading notice). The animation display of the normal hold image 506 (at the time of hold occurrence without pre-reading notice) at the time of normal hold occurrence is, for example, a fade-in display of the normal hold image 506, an animation that appears by moving from outside the screen such as at the bottom of the screen, and rotation. There are animations such as shaking and shaking, animations that add color changes such as flashing for a moment, and animations that scale the size for a moment. Since the normal hold image 506 is displayed on the effect layer 524, if the screen transformation effect is executed during the animation display at the time of the hold occurrence, the frame image including the image in the middle of the animation display may be sequentially transformed. Alternatively, the display content may be updated so that the animation display of the normal hold image 506 included in the target object 516 is continued during the display of the screen deformation effect, that is, during the transformation of the target object 516. In this way, even if the screen deformation effect is executed during the animation display of the normal hold image 506 at the time of the hold occurrence, by continuing the animation display without stopping, the flow of the effect may be unnatural or uncomfortable. Can be prevented. Even if the pending occurrences are continuous and the animation display at the time of the pending occurrence is continuous, the normal reserved image corresponding to the later incoming ball is not stopped without stopping the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the earlier incoming ball. 506 animation displays are executed in parallel. Therefore, depending on the pending occurrence timing, (1) if there is a previous ball entering while the screen deformation effect is being executed, it is normal to correspond to the previous ball entering while the screen deformation effect is being executed. If the animation display of the hold image 506 is executed and there is a later ball entry during the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the screen deformation effect and the previous ball entry, the normal hold corresponding to the previous ball entry is performed. Without stopping the animation display of the image 506, the screen deformation effect, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous entry, and the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later entry are executed in parallel at the same time. (2) When the execution start timing of the screen deformation effect is reached during the execution of the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous entry, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous entry is displayed. If the screen deformation effect is executed during execution and there is a later ball entry during the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball entry and the screen deformation effect, it corresponds to the previous ball entry. Simultaneously parallel the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous entry, the screen deformation effect, and the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later entry without stopping the animation display of the normal hold image 506. (3) Execution of the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first entry when there is a later entry during the execution of the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first entry. The animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later entry is executed, and the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the earlier entry and the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later entry. When the execution start timing of the screen deformation effect is reached during the display execution, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous entry and the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the subsequent entry are stopped. Instead, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the earlier entry, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later entry, and the screen deformation effect are executed in parallel. In any of the situations (1) to (3), there is a further entry in the situation (in the situation where the ball is being executed in parallel), and the entry is expected to be a big hit. Even if a high hold (for example, a hold scheduled to execute a super reach effect, a hold scheduled to be a big hit) occurs, in that situation, the hold is usually held as a look-ahead notice effect 506. It is preferable not to execute the animation display that is executed when changing the color or pattern of.

(Characteristic 10) In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of effect modes, and it is determined which type of effect can be executed among the effects such as the symbol variation effect and the advance notice effect for each effect mode.
To specifically explain the effect mode and the effect content executed in the effect mode, for example, "normal mode", "chance mode", and "rush mode" are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, and the game state. One of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set according to (or the variation pattern selection state) or the number of variations of the special symbol, and the variation effect according to the set effect mode is executed. Will be done. Basically, "normal mode" is set when the game state is the normal state, "chance mode" is set when the game state is the time saving state, and "rush" is set when the game state is the probable state. "Mode" is set. When any of the effect modes is set, as an effect (variable effect) suggesting that the user is staying in the effect mode, a background image dedicated to the effect mode (background displayed on the back of the decorative symbol 61) is displayed on the screen. (Image) is displayed, and a BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 108. Since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently staying from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing. Specifically, the "normal mode" is equipped with four stages, "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage", and the progress of 20 fluctuations or more or the super reach production is missed. Taking the opportunity, it shifts from "Stage A" to "Stage B", from "Stage B" to "Stage C", from "Stage C" to "Stage A", and "Pre-reading stage" in the pre-reading notice production judgment. If you win the execution (transition) of, the stage you are currently staying in will shift to the "look-ahead stage" (when you move to the "look-ahead stage", the execution of the super reach effect will be confirmed, and if you make a big hit, "look-ahead" Zoro eyes are displayed in the "stage", and if it is off, other than the zoro eyes are displayed in the "look-ahead stage", and the next change returns to the stage before the transition to the "look-ahead stage"). The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage" (different from stage BGM in "chance mode" and stage BGM in "rush mode"). , In "Stage A", the stage BGM is interrupted (finished) triggered by the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) of the non-reach loss (the loss that does not form the reach state, for example, a break such as "351"). ), The stage BGM is started from the beginning with the start of the next fluctuation, and in the "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage", the stage BGM is stopped even if the fluctuation is stopped (fixed stop) out of reach. The stage BGM is output continuously to the next fluctuation without interruption (it does not end) (the configuration is such that the "chance mode" and the "rush mode" are also continuously output).
Here, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed in any of the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage", but in any stage, when the pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped. The stage BGM is not output when (when a predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a symbol of the character "NEXT") is variablely displayed in the vicinity of a predetermined temporary stop position and then temporarily stopped is displayed as a middle symbol). (Interruption), the re-variation display (re-variation after the temporary stop) triggers the stage BGM to start from the beginning, or the stage BGM is switched to a specific BGM different from that before the re-variation display. After that, when developing into a super reach production in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", the background image of each stage (the stage where you stayed) is changed to the background image of the super reach production. (At the same time, it switches to the BGM dedicated to the super reach effect), the stage BGM is not output during the super reach effect, and the effect indicating the deviation is displayed in the super reach effect, the super reach effect is executed. The background image of each stage (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development of the super reach effect) is switched again in the variable display, but in that situation, the background of the stage until the next variable display starts. Even if the image is displayed, the stage BGM is not output, and the BGM dedicated to the super reach effect is not output (there is no sound, or a specific BGM different from the stage BGM and the BGM dedicated to the super reach effect is output). Therefore, even if the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) is out of reach, the stage BGM is not interrupted (it does not end), and the stage BGM is output following the next fluctuation. Even if it is "C" or "look-ahead stage" (even if it is not "stage A"), if it is missed via the super reach effect, the stage is before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop). The BGM will be interrupted, and the stage BGM will start from the beginning when the next fluctuation starts.
In the "chance mode" and the "rush mode", the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Here, a special effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (for example, "Continue!", Which is a notice of continuous dialogue and the execution of the subsequent pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed, and the subsequent execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. It is suggested that a pseudo-continuous effect (re-variable display) will be performed after the unconfirmed effect (such as "may continue?") Is executed, but this special effect is "Stage A" and "Stage A". It is displayed only in "Stage C" and not in "Stage B" and "Read-ahead stage". In other words, by preparing both a stage where the possibility of pseudo-continuous production can be detected and a stage where it cannot be detected, and repeating the stage transition between the stages, a production that does not make the player bored is realized. are doing. In "Stage A", a special effect using the character A as a motif is executed, but in "Stage C", a special effect using the character B as a motif is executed. In addition, it is a different effect from the special effect, and there is a line saying "Continued confirmed!" Whenever character C appears, it is a pseudo-continuous effect that confirms that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed after it occurs. A staging that is displayed) is also provided, and it is a staging that is different from the special staging and the pseudo-reaming staging. (For example, an effect in which a line saying "development confirmed!" Is always displayed when the character D appears) is also provided. The pseudo-continuous confirmation effect and the development confirmation effect can be executed in any of the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage". In this way, when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed, the execution expectation of the pseudo-continuous effect can be determined by displaying one or more combinations of the special effect, the pseudo-continuous fixed effect, and the development confirmed effect. It is possible to diversify the degree of development expectations for super reach production. It should be noted that all of the special effect, the pseudo-continuous confirmation effect, and the development confirmation effect may be executed during the one-time variation display, and in that case, during a certain re-variation display (for example, the first or second re-variation display). ) May include a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo-continuous confirmation effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development confirmation effect is executed. In the pattern in which the special effect is executed in the first or second time), the pseudo-continuous confirmation effect may be further executed during the certain revariation display after the special effect is executed during the certain revariation display.
In this embodiment, in addition to being able to execute different types of effects depending on which effect mode is being executed, the types of transformation target effects to be executed differ depending on the effect mode, and the transformation target effects are different. The type of suggestion effect that suggests that it can be executed and whether or not the suggestion effect is executed are different. Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when the pseudo-continuous effect "NEXT" is displayed, the screen deformation effect is not executed (although it is not the transformation target effect) in order to make the player recognize the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. , The screen transformation effect may be executed (may be the transformation target effect). In that case, the screen is more than the other predetermined advance notice effect (for example, the effect of stopping the enemy character during the above-mentioned super reach effect, the step-up advance notice effect which is a part of the advance notice effect before the reach state is reached, etc.). It is preferable to configure it so that the possibility of a deformation effect is low.

<Sixth aspect>
(Characteristic 11) First, it is possible to form a reach state during the symbol variation regardless of whether the symbol variation is such that the screen transformation effect is executed or the screen transformation effect is not executed. In addition, the degree of expectation that the screen deformation effect is executed differs depending on the mode of the symbol variation effect and the reach symbol mode when the symbol reaches. Specifically, for example, in the case of reaching with the symbol of "7", the screen deformation effect is more easily executed than in the case of reaching with the symbol of "2". Whether or not the screen deformation effect is executed (execution probability) is associated with it. More specifically, when the symbol of "7" is reached, the ratio between the case where the screen deformation effect of making the enemy character stand still during the super reach effect is executed and the case where the screen deformation effect is not executed is 5: 5, and "2". When the symbol of "" is reached, the ratio of the case where the screen deformation effect of making the enemy character stationary during the super reach effect is executed and the case where the screen deformation effect is not executed is 2: 8. The screen transformation effect may be configured so that it is easier to reach with the symbol of "7". For example, when the screen transformation effect is executed in the step-up notice effect and then the reach state is reached, " The probability of reaching with the symbol "7" is 10%, and the probability of reaching with the symbol "2" is 15%, but the screen deformation effect is not executed in the step-up notice effect, and then the reach state occurs. In that case, the probability of reaching with the symbol of "7" may be 1%, and the probability of reaching with the symbol of "2" may be 20%.

<7th aspect>
(Feature 12) In the screen deformation effect, the normal decorative symbol 502 may be included in the effect layer 524 as the target object 516, but the simple decorative symbol 504 is not included in the target object 516, and the game status layer 523 is included as an image showing the game status. Can be included in. Further, even during the execution of the screen deformation effect, it is possible to display the volume setting image 532 for volume adjustment and adjust the volume according to the operation of the player.

(Characteristic 13) When the screen transformation effect is executed while the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the execution of the screen transformation effect, the volume setting image 532 is not included in the frame image to be transformed. That is, the volume setting image 532 is continuously displayed on the volume light amount display layer 522, which is a layer different from the effect layer 524, and the volume can be adjusted by the operation of the player.

(Characteristic 14) The normal hold image 506 can be a target of deformation by the screen deformation effect, but the simple hold image 507 is not a target of deformation by the screen deformation effect. Since the movable accessory 520 can be operated even in a situation where the screen deformation effect including the normally reserved image 506 is included in the transformation target, the movable accessory 520 can be operated when the operating movable accessory 520 is viewed from the front. The visibility of the simple reserved image 507 is not impaired by the above. In this case, the visibility of the normally reserved image 506 may be displayed so as not to be obstructed by the movable accessory 520, or may be a specification that can be obstructed. Alternatively, the specification may be such that the normally reserved image 506 is not subject to deformation due to the screen deformation effect.

(Characteristic 15) When the screen deformation effect is executed, a specific effect sound (sound effect) is output. Specifically, at the start of execution of the screen transformation effect (1 second from the start), a sound effect "Pickin!" Is output, and the screen transformation effect is being executed (1 second from the start to the end). In the previous), the sound effect "Gugugu" is output, and at the end of the screen deformation effect (1 second until the end), the sound effect "Pisharn!" Is output. At this time, the sound effect at the start or end of the screen deformation effect is louder than the sound effect in the middle of the screen deformation effect under the condition that the volume level in the volume adjustment is the same (). This is such a relationship regardless of which volume level is set), so that the screen deformation effect is not only visually but also audibly sharp. Can be done. Regarding the degree of deformation / deformation ratio of the transformation target effect, at the start or end of the screen transformation effect, the degree of deformation / transformation ratio of the transformation target effect is different from the volume before the start of the screen transformation effect. It is small (the reduction ratio is small if it is reduced, and the initial position movement distance of each vertex is short if it is deformed by 4 vertices). It is preferable to configure the effect to be deformed so that the degree of deformation / deformation ratio is large (the reduction ratio is large if the effect is reduced, and the initial position movement distance of each vertex is long if the four vertices are deformed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a surprising effect in which the visual sharpness and the auditory sharpness are reversed. The volume level in the volume adjustment is provided, for example, in five stages, and can be set to any of levels 1 to 5 as the volume adjustment, and the production sound corresponding to various effects is set to the volume corresponding to the set volume level. Is output. Here, even if the volume level is the same, the volume differs depending on the production type. For example, as described above, the sound effect "Pickin!" At the start of execution of the screen transformation effect (1 second from the start) and the sound effect "Pishan!" At the end of the screen transformation effect (1 second until the end). Is louder than the "Gugugu" sound effect during the execution of the screen transformation effect (1 second after the start to 1 second before the end), regardless of which volume level is set ( For example, at volume level 1, the sound effects of "Pickin!" And "Pishan!" Are 30 dB, the sound effect of "Gugugu" is 20 dB, and at volume level 5, "Pickin!" And "Pickin!" The sound effect with "Pisharn!" Is 80 dB, and the sound effect with "Gugugu" is 70 dB).
(Characteristic 16) As described above, the normally held image 506 and the changing image 508 may also be included in the target object 516 and displayed as the target of deformation in the screen deformation effect.
(Feature 17) Alternatively, as shown in the game status layer 523 of FIG. 33, the normal hold image 506 and the changing image 508 are not included in the target object 516 as the target of deformation in the screen deformation effect, and are another layer of the game. It may be a specification displayed on the situation layer 523.

<8th aspect>
(Feature 18) When a predetermined error occurs, the effect display device 60 displays an error warning image 536 indicating the error. If an error occurs during execution of the screen transformation effect, the error warning image 536 is not included in the frame image to be transformed, and the error display layer 521 is a layer different from the effect layer 524 on which the screen transformation effect is displayed. Is displayed.

(Characteristic 19) The production process of the super reach effect has a first half part and a second half part, and when the screen deformation effect is executed, the development to the second half part, which is the so-called back button effect, is more definite in the first half part. Alternatively, a red light emission effect that suggests a high degree of expectation is likely to occur. It is desirable that the screen deformation effect here is before the super reach effect. For example, there is a case where the screen deformation effect is executed by the step-up notice effect before the reach state is reached, but other than that. For example, the specification is such that the screen deformation effect of stopping the enemy character during the super reach effect is executed in the first half, and the screen transformation effect is executed in the first half, which suggests the appearance of the back button effect in the first half. The light emission effect of is likely to occur. The back button effect is that a button image or a button operation instruction is not displayed on the screen, but when the player operates the effect button 109 at a predetermined timing, a specific effect (here, a light emission effect) appears. Here, it is executed in the first half. Further, the light emitting effect is an effect of changing the emission color of the decorative lamp 111 around the effect display device 60 and the color (color as an image) of the effect display imitating the light on the effect display device 60, and the emission color. The degree of expectation increases in the order of blue → green → red (the degree of expectation for development in the latter half or the degree of expectation for big hits increases). The back button effect can be automatically repeated by pressing and holding the effect button 109. As a modification, if the screen transformation effect that makes the enemy character stand still in the latter half of the super reach effect is executed instead of the first half, and the screen transformation effect is executed in the second half, the screen transformation effect is performed. Compared to the case where it is not executed, the emission color of the decorative lamp 111 around the effect display device 60 is achieved by the continuous striking effect of the effect button 109 in the first half of the super reach effect (automatic continuous striking is possible by pressing and holding the effect button 109). And the color of the effect display that imitates the light on the effect display device 60 is not blue or green, but is configured so that it tends to be red, which suggests that the development to the latter half of the super reach effect is deterministic or highly expected. May be good.

(Feature 20) A button image that is not a normal color (for example, white), for example, a red button image or a rainbow-colored button that suggests that the jackpot expectation is relatively high when the screen deformation effect is executed. Images are easy to display. The button image here may be a button image before the reach state or a button image during the super reach effect, and the player actually operates the effect button 109 while this button image is displayed. Taking this as an opportunity, an effect other than the button image is displayed. For example, if a button image is displayed before the reach state is reached and the effect button 109 is operated, a dialogue notice effect (an effect in which the expectation of a big hit differs depending on the content of the dialogue and the color of the balloon) is displayed, and the super reach effect is in progress (second half). When the button image is displayed and the effect button 109 is operated, the cut-in effect (the cut-in screen of the ally character is displayed, and the type of character displayed in the cut-in and the color of the cut-in are displayed. (Production with different jackpot expectations) is executed. Here, a type of effect that has a higher expectation of a big hit when a button image that is not a normal color is displayed rather than a button image of a normal color (in the case of a line advance notice effect, a red line advance notice effect and a cut-in). If it is a production, the red cut-in effect) is more likely to be displayed when the effect button 109 is operated. In addition, in this embodiment, when the screen deformation effect is executed before the button image is displayed, the normal color is higher than the normal color button image as compared with the case where the screen deformation effect is not executed. Button images that are not are more likely to be displayed. The effect of instructing (prompting) the player's operation by displaying the button image is referred to as an operation instruction effect (button effect).
Further, in the present embodiment, there is a button appearance fanning effect which is an effect of inciting whether or not the operation instruction effect (button effect) is started. In this button appearance fanning effect, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the effect button 109 is displayed in advance on the screen, and then a button image imitating the effect button 109 appears (that is, the operation instruction effect is started). It will be a production that makes you expect. In this button appearance fanning effect, when the silhouette image of the effect button 109 gradually changes to the button image, the fanning success effect is achieved. On the other hand, in this button appearance fanning effect, if the silhouette image of the effect button 109 fades out from the screen, the fanning fails. When displaying the button image, it is not always necessary to execute such a button appearance fanning effect, and the button image may be displayed suddenly without going through the button appearance fanning effect. Here, the button appearance fanning effect may be provided with a plurality of types of display modes, and when configured as such, for example, the button appearance fanning effect accompanied by the red effect is more than the button appearance fanning effect accompanied by the blue effect. It may be configured so that it is more likely to change to a button image. In addition, as another modification, when the button appearance fanning effect is executed, it may always change to the button image, and when configured in such a way, the red effect is more than the button appearance fanning effect accompanied by the blue effect. The button appearance fanning effect accompanied by may be configured so that the jackpot expectation is higher, or multiple types of button images are provided (blue button image, red button image, etc. are provided, and the red button image is more than the blue button image. It is easier to execute a notice effect with a high degree of expectation, for example, it is easier to execute a red line advance notice effect than a blue line advance notice effect), and a button appearance fanning effect with a red effect is more likely than a button appearance fanning effect with a blue effect. The effect may be configured to be a specific button image (for example, a red button image). In addition to the above, when the button image is always changed to the button image when the button appearance fanning effect is executed, it takes a longer time (for example, 4 seconds) than the button appearance fanning effect for a short time (for example, 2 seconds). ) Button appearance fanning effect may be configured to have a higher expectation of big hit, or a button appearance for a long time (for example, 4 seconds) may be performed rather than a short time (for example, 2 seconds) button appearance fanning effect. The fanning effect may be configured to be a specific button image (for example, a red button image). In addition, when the display mode of the button appearance fanning effect is configured to be provided, the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after reach) is better than the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before reach). It may be configured so that the button appearance fanning effect with high expectation can be easily executed, or the button appearance fanning effect is not executed in the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before reach), and the latter half of the variable display is displayed. It may be configured so that the button appearance fanning effect can be executed only for the part (specific timing after reach).
During the execution of the operation instruction effect, the operation valid period (input valid time) during which the operation of the effect button 109 is valid is set. The operation valid period is a period during which the operation is effectively accepted when the effect button 109 is operated. "Effectively accepting the operation of the effect button 109" means that when the effect button 109 is operated, the operation of the effect button 109 is effectively accepted by the sub-board 300, and a predetermined process is performed based on the effective operation. Means to be done. It should be noted that the predetermined process corresponds to a process of advancing the dialogue notice effect triggered by the operation of the effect button 109. During this operation valid period, the effect button 109 (LED element built in the effect button 109) is emitted and displayed, and a button image imitating the effect button 109 and the remaining period of the operation valid period are visually displayed on the screen. An indicator image is displayed to notify that the operation of the effect button 109 is valid or to prompt the operation input. Further, on the screen, a ring-shaped effect image (referred to as a "specific image") that emits sparks is displayed around the button image. This specific image gradually expands as the operation validity period elapses. Then, when the effect button 109 is operated during the operation valid period, the dialogue advance notice effect is advanced. When the effect button 109 is operated, the display mode of the specific image is forcibly changed to the final display mode. The final display mode of the specific image is a display mode when the specific image is magnified to the maximum extent. The operation instruction effect (button effect) is an effect (button effect pattern A) in which a specific image is displayed while the button image and the indicator image are being displayed (during the operation valid period), but other of the present embodiment. The button effect (button effect other than the operation instruction effect) is an effect (button effect pattern B) in which a specific image is not displayed while the button image and the indicator image are being displayed (during the operation valid period).
In the dialogue preview effect, if any one of the multiple characters (the above-mentioned ally character and enemy character) appears and emits a predetermined dialogue, a specific image is final around this character. It is continuously displayed in the display mode. In this dialogue advance notice effect, the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested according to the display mode (display color) of the dialogue emitted by the character. In this embodiment, three types of dialogue display colors, "blue", "red", and "giraffe pattern", are set, and the jackpot expectation level is in the order of "blue"<"red"<"giraffepattern". Increases by one step. When the dialogue advance notice effect is started (when the effect button 109 is operated), the button image and the indicator image are hidden, but the specific image is continuously displayed. As a modification of the present embodiment, the dialogue notice effect may be configured as a step-up type effect. This step-up effect is set so that the display process of the notice effect is divided into a plurality of stages, the number of stages to be displayed is variable, and the higher the number of stages, the higher the expectation for the big hit. Is an advanced type of production in which the production mode (character and dialogue) is changed stepwise according to a predetermined order, and the high degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested or notified according to the number of stages of development. For example, the step-up effect is composed of two stage effect steps (step-up 1, step-up 2), and the effect mode (character and dialogue) displayed in step-up 1 which is the first stage effect step. And the effect mode (character and dialogue) displayed in step-up 2, which is the second stage effect step, may be different.
The flow of the production is as follows.
(A) When the button appearance fanning effect is started, a silhouette image showing the silhouette of the effect button 109 is displayed on the screen. When this silhouette image gradually changes to a button image and becomes successful, the operation instruction effect is started.
(B) When the operation instruction effect is started, the operation valid period of the effect button 109 is set, the effect button 109 is emitted and displayed, a button image imitating the effect button 109, and the remaining period of the operation valid period. An indicator image that visually indicates is displayed on the screen. In addition, a specific circular image (effect image) that emits sparks is displayed around the button image. Then, such a display prompts the user to operate the effect button 109 within the button operation valid period.
(C) As the button operation valid period elapses, the display mode (remaining period) of the indicator image changes, and the specific image is enlarged and displayed around the button image. At this time, if the effect button 109 is operated within the operation valid period, the operation instruction effect is switched to the dialogue advance notice effect. At this time, the button image and the indicator image are hidden. On the other hand, the effect image is forcibly changed to the final display mode and continuously displayed as it is.
(D) When the dialogue notice effect is started, the character and the dialogue "It's a big chance" are displayed on the screen, and the display color of the dialogue suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. A specific image is continuously displayed in the final display mode around the character and the dialogue. By displaying the specific image straddling the operation instruction effect and the dialogue advance notice effect in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the dialogue advance notice effect is generated when the effect button 109 is operated (this time). It is suggested that the button production of is a dialogue notice production).
Further, as a modification of the above-described embodiment, the case where the button appearance fanning effect is executed is the case where the button appearance fanning effect is executed rather than the case where the button appearance fanning effect is determined by lottery and the button appearance fanning effect is not executed. The jackpot expectation in the variable display may be configured to be relatively high. In addition, the longer the execution time of the button appearance fanning effect (display time of the silhouette image), the higher the expectation of a big hit in the variable display, or the accuracy of indicating whether or not the big hit is triggered by the button operation. It may be configured to generate a high effect. At that time, if the dialogue notice effect (button appearance fanning effect) is executed at the timing of the winning branch (specific timing after reach, which is the latter half of the above-mentioned fluctuation display), the button appearance fanning effect effect time ( It is preferable that the display time of the silhouette image) is set longer than the operation valid period of the effect button 109. Contrary to the configuration, the effect time of the button appearance fanning effect (display time of the silhouette image) may be set shorter than the operation valid period of the effect button 109. Further, as another modification, as a display mode of the button image, a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image, a red button image, a rainbow color button image, a large button image, a small button image, etc.) may be prepared. good. In that case, whether or not the button appearance fanning effect can be executed and the effect time when it is executed may be different depending on the display mode of the button image scheduled to be executed thereafter. Further, as a further modification, it is possible to execute the dialogue warning effect even during the execution of one or more times of fluctuation display (look-ahead fluctuation display which is the fluctuation before the target) before the operation holding ball to be read ahead is digested. (The button image can be displayed), and the button appearance fanning effect is performed when the look-ahead variation display is being executed, as compared to when the variation display (the variation display) when the operation hold ball to be read ahead is digested. May be reduced, and the execution of the look-ahead variation display is greater than the execution of the variation display (the variation display) when the operation holding ball to be read ahead is digested. , You may reduce the possibility that a high-expected button appearance fanning effect (such as a button appearance fanning effect with a red effect as described above or a long-time (for example, 4 seconds) button appearance fanning effect) is executed. .. As another modification, the button appearance fanning effect is not executed in the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before reach) (or the button appearance fanning effect with high expectation is not executed and the button appearance fanning effect with low expectation is not executed. (Or execute the button appearance fanning effect in the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after reach) (or execute the high expectation button appearance fanning effect instead of the low expectation button appearance fanning effect). ), The longer the period between the predetermined timing before reach, which is the first half of the variable display, and the specific timing after reach, which is the latter half of the variable display (for example, 90 seconds is better than 60 seconds). , The jackpot expectation may be high, or the button image at a specific timing after reach, which is the latter half of the variable display, tends to be a high expectation image (for example, a red button image instead of a blue button image). It may be configured to be easy to become). Further, the button effect pattern A is used in the first half of the variable display (predetermined timing before reach), and the button effect pattern B is used in the latter half of the variable display (specific timing after reach). May be good. Further, although the details will be described later, the timekeeping for displaying the button image at the predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the fluctuation display, is started from the start time of the fluctuation display, and is started in the second half of the fluctuation display. The timekeeping for displaying the button image at a specific timing after a certain reach starts from the start time of the specific effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect), and is at a predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the variable display. The timekeeping time for displaying the button image at a specific timing after reach, which is the latter half of the variable display, may be longer than the timekeeping time for displaying the button image.

(Characteristic 21) A screen deformation effect may be executed as a preview effect by pre-reading. In such a configuration, the screen deformation effect is not executed due to the symbol change being executed at the new ball entry timing, which is the look-ahead timing, and the next change (the next change of the change with a new ball entry). The screen transformation effect is executed. Specifically, the fluctuation with a new ball entry is a normal symbol fluctuation (the screen does not deform and the normal decorative symbol 502 fluctuates), and immediately after the start of the next fluctuation (for example, 0.5 from the start of the fluctuation). Until (seconds later), the normal symbol fluctuation is the same (the screen does not deform and the normal decorative symbol 502 fluctuates), but after that, it is in the middle of the target fluctuation that is the target of the look-ahead (for example, 10 from the start of the fluctuation of the target fluctuation). Until after a second), the symbol change continues after the screen deformation effect is executed. The symbol variation after the screen deformation effect is executed is, for example, a variation display of the normal decorative symbol 502 in a state where the screen is tilted or the screen is reduced. As described above, in the target fluctuation targeted for pre-reading, the screen deformation effect is continued until the middle, and then the normal symbol variation effect is switched to. In addition, it will switch at least until it develops into a super reach production. In principle, even if a power failure such as a power failure occurs due to a fluctuation in front of the target during the screen deformation effect that is continued over these multiple symbol variation effects and the power is restored from the power failure, in principle, before the target. The fluctuation of is not restored to the original screen deformation effect. However, the screen deformation effect may be executed again in the target fluctuation that is the target of the look-ahead.

(Characteristic 22) If an error occurs before the screen deformation effect is executed and the effect before the transformation to be displayed in the frame image to be transformed is not started, the effect before the transformation is started. However, the screen deformation effect is not executed. For example, there is a case where the timer for measuring the timing of the effect by the time measuring means 307 of the sub-board 300 has a problem, so that the effect before the transformation to be displayed in the frame image to be deformed cannot be started. As a modification example, even if the effect before the transformation is not started due to a malfunction of the timer or the like, the screen transformation effect may be executed with only the background effect being displayed as the target of the transformation.

(Characteristic 23) The standby demo screen is displayed on the effect layer 524, but is not subject to deformation due to the screen deformation effect. In the modified example, the standby demo screen may be displayed on the game status layer 523.
(Characteristic 24) When the screen deformation effect is specified to be executed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 by the player, the execution start timing of the screen deformation effect depends on the operation start timing of the effect button 109. Although the button image is also displayed on the effect layer 524, it is not a target of transformation by the screen transformation effect, and the screen transformation effect is executed after the effect button 109 is operated and the button image is deleted. In the modification, the button image may be displayed on the game status layer 523. Further, in the further modification example, when the display timing of the button image is reached during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the button image may also be the target (transformation target) of the screen transformation effect, and the effect during the button image display. The effect displayed when the button 109 is operated may also be the target (transformation target) of the screen deformation effect. If the button image starts to be displayed during the execution of the screen transformation effect, or if the button image display end timing is earlier than the screen transformation effect execution end timing, the button image is displayed from the display start to the end. However, if the display end timing of the button image is later than the execution end timing of the screen transformation effect, the button image is displayed as the screen transformation effect from the start to the middle of the display, and is normally displayed until the end. Displayed in an aspect (without deformation). This also applies to the effect displayed when the operation of the effect button 109 during the button image display is performed, and the effect displayed when the effect button 109 during the button image display is operated during the execution of the screen deformation effect. If the display end timing of the effect displayed by the operation of the effect button 109 during the button image display is earlier than the execution end timing of the screen deformation effect, the effect button 109 during the button image display is displayed. The effect displayed with the operation of If the display end timing of the effect is later, the effect displayed by the operation of the effect button 109 during the button image display is displayed as a screen deformation effect from the start to the middle of the display, and is a normal mode until the end. Is displayed (without deformation).

<9th aspect>
(Characteristic 25) During the execution of the screen deformation effect, a hold corresponding to a new ball entry occurs, and the advance information corresponding to the hold is information that can execute the look-ahead notice effect (for example). , Even if the hold has a high expectation that the super reach effect can be executed, the hold is a big hit, etc.), the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted. For example, while the screen deformation effect is being executed, it may be controlled not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect triggered by a new ball entry, or it may be controlled not to execute the pre-reading itself.

<10th aspect>
(Feature 26) When the screen deformation effect is executed, the simple decorative symbol 504 is displayed in a form included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 which is not the target of the transformation in the screen deformation effect. Therefore, when the simple decorative symbol 504 that was displayed at the position in the effect screen 500, that is, the position that overlaps the frame image 514 before the start of the screen deformation effect, is reduced in the frame image 514 in the screen transformation effect. The simple decorative symbol 504 may be displayed outside the frame image 514, for example, at a position overlapping the frame image 510 which is the special first image and the background image 518 which is the second image (predetermined timing during screen deformation effect execution (for example). , Middle stage) will have such a display relationship). On the other hand, the normal decorative symbol 502 is not included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 in the screen deformation effect, but may be included in the frame image to be transformed in the effect layer 524. Therefore, the normal decorative symbol 502 can be displayed at a position overlapping the frame frame image 514 which is a special first image, for example, but is not displayed at a position overlapping the background image 518 which is a second image in the screen deformation effect. It is preferable that such a display relationship is always satisfied while the screen deformation effect is being executed, but as a modification, such a display is at least at a predetermined timing (for example, in the middle stage) during the execution of the screen deformation effect. It may be a related specification (other than the predetermined timing, it may be displayed at a position overlapping with the background image 518). Further, as another modification, the normal decorative symbol 502 may also be specified to be displayed in a form included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523.

(Characteristic 27) When the screen deformation effect is executed, the simple hold image 507 is displayed in a form included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 which is not the target of the transformation in the screen deformation effect. On the other hand, the normally reserved image 506 is not included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 in the screen deformation effect, but may be included in the frame image to be transformed in the effect layer 524. As a modification, the normal reserved image 506 may also be displayed in a form included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523.

(Characteristic 28) As described above, in the normal decorative symbol 502, in addition to the fluctuation (for example, movement from top to bottom), at the start of the fluctuation, immediately after the temporary stop, after the reach is established, during the temporary stop, etc. , When configured to perform a display accompanied by a predetermined operation (operation at the start of fluctuation, operation at the time of temporary stop, operation at the time of reach establishment, operation at the time of shaking), as a further predetermined operation, a symbol such as "777" is displayed. When the combination of the big hit symbols is established by aligning the three, the big hit operation such as enlarging the symbols may be configured to be feasible. In such a configuration, the screen deformation effect is not executed when the jackpot operation is executed, but it is preferable to enable the screen deformation effect to be executed when the other predetermined operation is executed. While the screen deformation effect is being executed, the jackpot operation is not executed, but it is preferable that other predetermined operations can be executed.

(Characteristic 29) If a new hold occurs during the execution of the screen deformation effect, the normal hold image 506 may be included in the target of the transformation by the screen deformation effect, or the normal hold image 506 may be included in the transformation by the screen deformation effect. The specifications may not be included in the target. It is preferable that this is a specification during the fluctuation period until the development of the super reach effect in the variation that develops into the super reach effect. Since the reserved image 506 is normally hidden during the display of the super reach effect, when the screen transformation effect is executed for the super reach effect, it is not included in the target of the transformation by the screen transformation effect in any case. Note that the duration of the process of transforming the frame image in the screen transformation effect (that is, the execution period of the screen transformation effect) is longer than the animation display time at the time of pending occurrence, regardless of the effect to be transformed. Is set to.

<11th aspect>
(Feature 30) When the hold is stored in the effect display device 60 during the normal effect, the normal hold image 506 indicating the number of hold is displayed. Of the normal hold images 506, the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the lottery value at which the symbol variation display is started is switched to the changing image 508 indicating that the symbol is changing. Here, while the screen deformation effect is being executed, the reserved image 506 is normally hidden, while the changing image 508 is continuously displayed. The in-frame still effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, is an effect that freezes the previously displayed effect like a pause display and transforms the frame image that is the still image, and is in the frame image. Since it is preferable not to include a moving image in terms of staging, the reserved image 506 is usually hidden. On the other hand, since the changing image 508 does not increase or decrease during the symbol change, the display is continued as it is even during the execution of the screen deformation effect. In the modified example, the specification may be such that the changing image 508 is also hidden during the execution of the screen deformation effect.

The simple hold image 507 continues to be displayed while the screen deformation effect is executed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs during the execution of the screen deformation effect, the additional display of the hold image 506 is not normally performed, but the number of the hold numbers shown in the simple hold image 507 does not interfere with the screen deformation effect. Will be increased.

(Feature 31) When executing the in-frame still effect, which is one of the screen deformation effects, the normal hold image 506 is added to the frame image, which is a still image in which the previously displayed effect is stopped like a pause display. May be included. If the animation display at the time of the hold occurrence is being executed, the animation display is also included in the frame image in a stationary state. The display of the changing image 508 may be included in the frame image, and the animation display is also included in the frame image in a stationary state. The simple hold image 507 continues to be displayed while the screen deformation effect is executed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs during the execution of the screen deformation effect, the additional display of the hold image 506 is not normally performed, but the number of the hold numbers shown in the simple hold image 507 does not interfere with the screen deformation effect. Will be increased.

(Feature 32) When executing the in-frame still effect, which is one of the screen deformation effects, the normal decorative symbol 502 is added to the frame image, which is a still image in which the previously displayed effect is stopped like a pause display. It may be hidden without being included. On the other hand, the simple decorative symbol 504 continues the variable display. It should be noted that one round of variation of the simple decorative symbol 504 (as described above, for example, when the type of the simple decorative symbol 504 is "1" to "7", "123" → "234" → "345" → " If the variable display is as follows: 456 "->" 567 "->" 671 "->" 712 "->" 123 "-> ..., 1 is from the first" 123 "to the next" 123 ". The still time of the effect in the screen deformation effect is longer than the time of the lap). In this way, if it can be recognized that the simple decorative symbol 504 makes at least one lap during the screen deformation effect, it is possible to distinguish whether the current game situation is paused or really stopped (the game is not progressing). can.

(Feature 33) Further, unlike the feature 32, when the in-frame still effect, which is one of the screen deformation effects, is executed, it is a still image in which the previously displayed effect is stopped like a pause display. The normal decorative symbol 502 may be included in the frame image, but in that case, the normal decorative symbol 502 is a fixed display. That is, normally, the decorative symbol 502 does not display variable or animated. On the other hand, the simple decorative symbol 504 continues the variable display. It should be noted that one round of variation of the simple decorative symbol 504 (as described above, for example, when the type of the simple decorative symbol 504 is "1" to "7", "123" → "234" → "345" → " If the variable display is as follows: 456 "->" 567 "->" 671 "->" 712 "->" 123 "-> ..., 1 is from the first" 123 "to the next" 123 ". The still time of the effect in the screen deformation effect is longer than the time of the lap). In this way, if it can be recognized that the simple decorative symbol 504 makes at least one lap during the screen deformation effect, it is possible to distinguish whether the current game situation is paused or really stopped (the game is not progressing). can.

(Characteristic 34) In the in-frame still effect, which is one of the screen deformation effects, an image in which a still image in which the previously displayed effect is stopped like a pause display is color-inverted is targeted as an in-frame image 514. It may be included in the object 516, and its stillness and color inversion may be processed at the same time, or it may be deformed at the same time. However, during the execution of the in-frame still effect, which is one of the screen deformation effects, the in-frame still effect that targets the frame image, which is a still image in which the effect is stopped like a pause display, is executed. However, the transformation process is not started while the effect is stationary.
(Feature 35) The volume setting image 532 can be displayed and the volume can be adjusted even while the screen deformation effect is being executed.
(Characteristic 36) When the screen deformation effect is executed while the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the screen deformation effect occurs, the display of the volume setting image 532 is continued as it is, and the operation by the player is performed in parallel. It is also possible to adjust the volume via.

(Characteristic 37) If the screen deformation effect is executed in a situation where the error warning image 536 is displayed due to an error occurring before the screen deformation effect is executed, the display of the error warning image 536 is continued as it is. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume which is the specified volume, the volume can be adjusted in parallel through the operation by the player, and the volume setting image 532 is displayed on the volume light amount display layer 522 in FIG. 33. Can be displayed. However, the volume setting image 532 is not included in the transformation target in the screen transformation effect. More specifically, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player operation during the execution of the screen deformation effect, and the player operation is further performed while the screen transformation effect is being executed and the volume setting image 532 is being displayed. When the display of the volume adjustment and the volume setting image 532 is changed, the volume setting image 532 (for example, "the volume level is 1" is displayed) and the screen transformation effect are being executed and displayed during the screen transformation effect and before the display change. In any of the volume setting images 532 after the change (for example, the display of "volume level is 2"), the images are displayed in a display mode in which the screen is not deformed. Further, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player operation immediately before the execution of the screen deformation effect, and the screen deformation effect is executed immediately after that (while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed), and the volume setting image 532 is being displayed and the screen is displayed. When the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by performing the player operation during the execution of the transformation effect, the volume setting image 532 (for example, "volume level" before the execution of the screen transformation effect and before the display change is performed. Is 1 ”) and the volume setting image 532 (for example,“ Volume level is 2 ”is displayed) after the screen transformation effect is executed and the display is changed. Will be done.

(Characteristic 38) During the animation display of the normal hold image 506 at the time of the hold occurrence, an in-frame still effect (an effect such as a pause display of the effect displayed up to that point) was executed, which is one of the screen deformation effects. In this case, if the display of the normal hold image 506 is maintained, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 may be stopped (that is, the display of the normal hold image 506 continues, but is displayed without animation). .. The animation display of the normal hold image 506 referred to here is an animation display at the time of normal hold occurrence, and the display that changes the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 as a look-ahead notice effect is excluded.

(Characteristic 39) In the screen deformation effect, the frame image of the video that has been displayed up to that point (in the case of the in-frame still effect, it is one frame image that has been stopped like a pause display, and in the case of the in-frame video effect. When the target of color inversion (transformation target) is (a plurality of frame images that can be sequentially switched), the volume setting image 532 can be displayed even during color inversion, and the player operates in parallel. Volume adjustment is possible. In the subsequent "color inversion", both the frame image that is stopped like a pause display in the in-frame still effect and the plurality of frame images that are sequentially switched in the in-frame video effect are subject to the color inversion process. do.
(Characteristic 40) In a situation where the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the color inversion is executed, the display of the volume setting image 532 is continued as it is even if the color inversion is executed after that, and the operation by the player is performed in parallel. It is also possible to adjust the volume via.
(Characteristic 41) In a situation where an error occurs before the color inversion is executed and the error warning image 536 is displayed, the display of the error warning image 536 is continued as it is even if the color inversion is executed after that. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume which is the specified volume, the volume can be adjusted in parallel through the operation by the player, and the volume setting image 532 is displayed on the volume light amount display layer 522 in FIG. 33. Can be displayed. However, the volume setting image 532 is not subject to color inversion. More specifically, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player operation during the color inversion, and the player operation is further performed while the color inversion is being executed and the volume setting image 532 is being displayed to adjust the volume. When the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed, the volume of the volume setting image 532 (for example, "the volume level is 1" is displayed) during color inversion and before the display change is being executed and the volume is changed after the display is changed. In any of the setting images 532 (for example, the display of "volume level is 2"), the images are displayed in a display mode in which the colors are not inverted. Further, the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player operation immediately before the execution of the color inversion, and the color inversion is executed immediately after that (the volume setting image 532 is being displayed), and the volume setting image 532 is being displayed and the color inversion is performed. When the volume adjustment and the display change of the volume setting image 532 are performed by the player operation during the execution, the volume setting image 532 before the color inversion execution and the display change (for example, "the volume level is 1"". In both the volume setting image 532 (for example, the display of "volume level is 2") after the color inversion is executed and the display is changed, the image is displayed in a display mode in which the color is not inverted.
(Characteristic 42) If the display of the normal hold image 506 is maintained when the color inversion is executed during the animation display of the normal hold image 506 at the time of the hold occurrence, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 may be stopped. (That is, the display of the reserved image 506 continues normally, but is displayed without animation). The animation display of the normal hold image 506 referred to here is an animation display at the time of normal hold occurrence, and the display that changes the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 as a look-ahead notice effect is excluded.

<12th aspect>
FIG. 35 schematically shows a plurality of buffer areas obtained by dividing a frame buffer.
(Feature 43) The effect display control means 305 includes a frame buffer 338 that temporarily stores a frame image constituting a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device 60. The frame buffer 338 has, as a plurality of buffer areas having a capacity capable of storing a frame image, the first buffer area 540, the second buffer area 542, the third buffer area 544, the fourth buffer area 546, and the fifth buffer area 548. Divided to include 5 buffer areas.
(Characteristic 44) In the effect pattern for executing the screen deformation effect, for example, three buffer areas of a first buffer area 540, a second buffer area 542, and a third buffer area 544 are used.

FIG. 36 schematically shows the relationship between the display size of the frame image and the capacity of the frame buffer area.
(Feature 45) The frame buffer 338 of the present embodiment includes a first buffer area 540 and a first buffer area 540 having a capacity capable of storing a frame image having a first display size exceeding the screen area size of the effect display device 60. Is a second buffer area 542 having a capacity capable of storing a frame image having a second display size, which is a different area and is the same as the screen area size of the effect display device 60 or smaller than the screen area size of the effect display device 60. At least include. As schematically represented in FIG. 36, the first buffer area 540 has a capacity capable of storing an image of the target object 516 (that is, the above-mentioned "frame image of the first display size"). The second buffer area 542 has a capacity capable of storing the in-frame image 514 (that is, the above-mentioned "frame image of the second display size"), but is a capacity that cannot store the entire target object 516. When the display of the image of the target object 516 is controlled to be 100% as it is, the display size exceeds the screen area size of the staging display device 60, and the frame image 510 is mainly out of the screen area. Is displayed on the effect display device 60 so that almost only the portion of the image 514 in the frame can be visually recognized by the player. That is, when the display control of the target object 516 is 100% in size, most of the frame image 510 is hardly displayed on the effect display device 60, or even if a part of the frame image 510 is displayed, it is hidden by the center decoration 64 and is hidden by the player. Is almost difficult to see. At least, the first buffer area 540 is used as a frame buffer when displaying an effect that can be the target of the screen deformation effect, and the second buffer area 542 is used as the frame buffer when displaying an effect that is not the target of the screen deformation effect. do. The plurality of types of effect patterns include a first special effect pattern in which an effect that can be a target of a screen deformation effect is defined, and a second special effect pattern in which an effect that is not a target of the screen deformation effect is defined. Is done.

As shown in FIG. 35, the third buffer area 544, the fourth buffer area 546, and the fifth buffer area 548 also have a capacity equivalent to that of the second buffer area 542, and have a capacity capable of storing the in-frame image 514. However, it is a capacity that cannot be stored up to the entire target object 516. In this way, the buffer area that can store the target object 516 including the frame image 510 is only the first buffer area 540, and the other buffer areas cannot store up to the target object 516, but the frame image 514 can be stored. I'm holding back. As a result, even if the frame buffer 338 does not necessarily have abundant data capacity, it is possible to secure five buffer areas by limiting the capacity of each buffer area to the required minimum limit. Further, this makes it possible to efficiently diversify the production while avoiding the conflict of use of the buffer area in the drawing process and suppressing the processing load.

In the first special effect pattern, the first buffer area 540 is used as a frame buffer, and the frame image of the first display size stored in the first buffer area 540 at a predetermined timing is displayed in the screen area of the effect display device 60. A moving image is displayed in the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating a new frame image in which a deformed image, an image showing the game situation, and a background image are combined so that the image can be displayed in the first buffer area 540. This is an effect pattern in which the first special effect to be displayed is defined. In the second special effect pattern, the second buffer area 542 is used as a frame buffer, and an image obtained by transforming a frame image of a second display size stored in the second buffer area 542 at a predetermined timing and a game situation are displayed. The first special effect is an effect of displaying a moving image on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating a new frame image obtained by synthesizing the shown image and the background image and storing it in the second buffer area 542. This is an effect pattern in which a different second special effect is defined.
(Characteristic 46) For each of the plurality of types of special effect patterns, it is determined which of the plurality of buffer areas is used as the frame buffer.

<13th aspect>
(Characteristic 47) For example, the first special effect pattern uses the first buffer area 540, the second special effect pattern uses the second buffer area 542, and the third special effect pattern uses the third buffer area 544. , The fourth buffer area 546 is used. In this way, it is possible to define a plurality of types of special effect patterns that use different buffer areas according to the size of the frame image to be transformed by the screen deformation effect, and improve the efficiency of drawing processing and the utilization efficiency of the frame buffer 338. It is possible to give variety to the production while maintaining it.
(Characteristic 48) It is stipulated that the first buffer area 540 is used in the fourth special effect pattern as in the first special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern is the same as in the second special effect pattern. 2 There may be a plurality of types of special effect patterns in which the buffer areas to be used overlap, such as the use of the buffer area 542 is determined to be used.
(Characteristic 49) The first special effect pattern and the second special effect pattern are not executed in parallel (by design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if they are executed within the same variation, the execution timings overlap. I can't). Further, the fourth special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern are also not executed in parallel (by design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if they are executed within the same variation, the execution timings overlap. I don't get it). The third special effect pattern is not executed in parallel with the first special effect pattern, the second special effect pattern, the fourth special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern (same variation in design). Execution timing cannot be duplicated even if it is not executed within or even if it is executed within the same fluctuation).

(Characteristic 50) Multiple special effect patterns that are scheduled to be displayed at the same time (they can be executed within the same variation by design and the execution timings can overlap within the same variation) are different from each other. It is stipulated to use the buffer area. However, for multiple special effect patterns that are not scheduled to be displayed at the same time (by design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if they are executed within the same variation, the execution timings cannot overlap), one special effect pattern. If the display of the effect by the other special effect pattern is decided during the display of the effect by, the effect by the other special effect pattern determined later is performed rather than the effect by one of the special effect patterns displayed earlier. Display with priority. For example, when the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern using the same first buffer area 540 are executed in parallel, the effect of the previously executed special effect pattern is displayed. Execution is stopped, and execution is started with priority given to the effect of the special effect pattern ordered later. Similarly, when the second special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern using the same second buffer area 542 are executed in parallel, the effect of the previously executed special effect pattern is produced. Is stopped and execution is started with priority given to the effect of the special effect pattern instructed later.

Here, "Cancel the execution of the effect of the special effect pattern that was executed earlier" cancels the execution of the screen transformation effect that has been executed until then, and reproduces the moving image before the execution of the screen transformation effect is started. It may be a process of returning to. As a result, even if the number of special effect patterns to be transformed by the screen deformation effect is increased, it is possible to avoid processing problems when the buffer areas to be used conflict. Further, even when the screen deformation effects are duplicated, it is possible to maintain normal image processing and reduce the burden of image processing by switching between the cancellation of the screen deformation effects and the priority effects. As a modification, by design, a plurality of types of special effect patterns that use the same buffer area may be configured to be executed in parallel (that is, they may be executed in parallel in advance). It may be designed), and if it is configured as such, for example, if the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern that use the same first buffer area 540 are executed in parallel. Stops the execution of the special effect pattern effect that has been executed earlier, and gives priority to the effect of the special effect pattern ordered later and starts execution. Similarly, when the second special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern using the same second buffer area 542 are executed in parallel, the effect of the previously executed special effect pattern is displayed. Execution is stopped, and execution is started with priority given to the effect of the special effect pattern ordered later.

FIG. 37 schematically shows the process of deforming the frame image stored in the buffer area. First, the frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 of the frame buffer 338 is read into the drawing memory 334 at a predetermined timing when the screen deformation effect is started to be executed (S900). This frame image is a target object 516 including an in-frame image 514 and a frame image 510, and is one frame of a moving image that has been displayed up to that point. This frame image is read into the drawing memory 334 and deformed, but the frame image following the moving image that was displayed until then is the frame image that was originally planned to be displayed, but after that, it is replaced with the frame image. From now on, a new frame image generated by the transformation process and the composition process will be displayed. Therefore, the enemy character included in the content of this frame image was displayed as moving in the still effect in the frame, but since it is still in this frame image, it looks like a captured image of a moving image. become. In the case of the in-frame moving image effect, by sequentially switching the frame images to be read into the drawing memory 334, it is displayed that the enemy characters included in the contents of those frame images are still moving.

When the target object 516 is stored in the first buffer area 540 and displayed on the effect display device 60, the frame image 510 is located outside the screen area of the effect display device 60 and is not substantially visible to the player. There are only a few parts that can be seen or are in a state. The target object 516 is reduced (S902) so that the frame image 510 fits in the screen area of the effect display device 60, so that the entire target object 516 can be visually recognized. In this figure, for convenience, the size of the target object 516 in S10 is set to 100%, and the target object 516 is reduced to about 80% in S12. However, in the actual drawing process of a moving image, instead of the process of instantly switching from 100% to 80%, microscopically, every time a new frame image is generated, drawing is repeated, for example, reduced by 1%. It is a gradual reduction / reduction process. The foreground image 517 and the background image 518 are superimposed on the target object 516 reduced in this way (S904). In this figure, as an example of the foreground image 517, an example of superimposing a lightning bolt-shaped object as the foreground of the target object 516 is drawn, but in addition, images showing the game situation such as the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple hold image 507 are also frame images. Overlay as a foreground while updating the content each time. The superimposed images in S14 are combined to form the next frame image 519 (S906), which is written to the first buffer area 540 to become the next frame image constituting the moving image.

The target object 516 of S14 is gradually deformed when the subsequent frame image is sequentially drawn. For example, the target object 516 of S14 is color-inverted, another foreground image 517 is superimposed on the image (S908), and an image and a background showing the game status such as the simple decorative symbol 504 and the simple hold image 507 whose contents have been updated. The images 518 are superposed, and these superposed images are combined to form a new frame image 519 (S910), which is written to the first buffer area 540 to become the next frame image constituting the moving image. .. After that, the target object 516 is sequentially deformed for each subsequent frame image, the foreground image 517 and the background image 518 are superimposed, and the updated simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple hold image 507 are superimposed (S912). As a result, a new frame image is combined to form a moving image.

<14th aspect>
(Characteristic 51) The first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern are formed so as to surround a main image portion having a display size equivalent to the screen area size of the effect display device 60 and the outer periphery of the main image portion. A frame image 510 is used to form one effect image, and at least a part of the frame image 510 initially located outside the screen area of the effect display device 60 is displayed in the screen area of the effect display device 60. A moving image is displayed on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating a new frame image in which an image in which the display ratio and shape of the effect image are changed and an image showing a game situation are sequentially generated so as to be possible. In this way, when executing the screen deformation effect, it is possible to create a more dynamic effect by adding deformation such as scaling or swinging while intentionally showing the frame image 510, which is a part that is normally difficult to see. can. When the specification is to display the normal hold image 506 on the frame image 510, the image including the normal hold image 506 may be deformed by the screen deformation effect.

The second special effect pattern, the third special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern produce one effect image in the main image portion having a display size equivalent to the screen area size of the effect display device 60. A moving image is displayed on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating a new frame image in which an image having a changed display ratio and shape of the effect image and an image showing a game situation are sequentially generated.
(Characteristic 52) The frame image 510 is not displayed in the second special effect pattern, the third special effect pattern, and the effect by the fifth special effect pattern. The display of the frame image 510 is not controlled even in a specific situation such as a standby demo screen or a big hit.

<15th aspect>
FIG. 38 shows a screen example of the third special effect pattern. The third special effect pattern is an effect accompanied by a screen deformation effect in which the deformation timing is determined by the operation input of the effect button 109. In the third special effect pattern, the button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing, and the player is urged to input the operation of the effect button 109. When the player operates the effect button 109, the frame image is transformed by the screen deformation effect. The button image 550 is displayed a plurality of times, and the frame image is deformed by the screen deformation effect each time the effect button 109 is operated according to the button image 550.

(Characteristic 53) In the third special effect pattern, when the operation input of the effect button 109 is performed, a new frame in which the image obtained by deforming the frame image at the operation input timing and the image showing the game situation are combined is combined. The moving image is displayed on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating images and storing them in the first buffer area 540. Further, when the operation input of the effect button 109 is performed, a new frame image obtained by synthesizing a deformed image of the frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 at the operation input timing and an image showing the game situation is generated. The moving image is displayed on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating and storing it in the second buffer area 542.

FIG. 39 schematically shows the process of using the buffer area in the third special effect pattern. In the third special effect pattern, frame images are alternately stored in the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546 each time the player operates the effect button 109. That is, the frame image of the moving image currently being displayed is sequentially stored in the third buffer area 544, and the button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing (S920). When the button image 550 is operated by the player, the frame image is read out from the third buffer area 544 (S922), an image modified by the screen deformation effect is generated (S924), and the fourth buffer is used as the next frame image. It is stored in the area 546 (S926). Frame images of moving images are sequentially stored in the fourth buffer area 546, and the button image 550 is displayed again at a predetermined timing.

When the button image 550 is operated by the player, the frame image is read from the fourth buffer area 546 (S928), an image to which the image is deformed by the screen deformation effect is generated (S930), and the third buffer is used as the next frame image. It is stored in the area 544 (S932). Frame images of moving images are sequentially stored in the third buffer area 544, and the button image 550 is displayed again at a predetermined timing. When the button image 550 is operated by the player, the frame image is read out from the third buffer area 544 (S934), an image modified by the screen deformation effect is generated (S936), and the fourth buffer is used as the next frame image. It is stored in the area 546 (S938). Frame images of moving images are sequentially stored in the fourth buffer area 546.

In this way, the storage of the frame image moved little by little while alternately using the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546 is repeated. As a result, when the screen deformation effect is executed, the progress and display of the effect can be firmly confirmed for the effect that the player must visually recognize while maintaining the dynamic feeling, for example, the effect button 109 and the image showing the game status. By doing so, it is possible to achieve both the dynamic feeling of the production and the visual recognition of the progress of the production. Further, in executing an effect having a high processing load such as repeating the screen deformation effect, the buffer area is divided into a plurality of parts and processed alternately, so that the processing load can be distributed and problems can be avoided.

(Characteristic 54) In the effect of the third special effect pattern, the button image 550 is not included in the target of the transformation by the screen deformation effect.
(Characteristic 55) A sixth special effect pattern may be further included. The effect of the sixth special effect pattern is not the target of the transformation by the screen deformation effect, but includes an effect mode as if the screen deformation effect was executed. However, since it is not a screen deformation effect, both the first display element and the second display element are operated in a staging manner, but an effect in which the first display element and the second display element are completely synchronized, such as the screen deformation effect. It is not a targeting motion, but a staging motion that does not synchronize the first display element and the second display element (for example, the first display element is a background display, and the second display element is a normal decorative symbol 502 or a display object peculiar to the effect. And so on).

The present invention has been described above based on the examples. It is understood by those skilled in the art that this embodiment is merely an example, and that various modifications are possible for each of these components and combinations of each processing process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. be.
Further, during the execution of the special game in this embodiment, a count-up effect (for example, a count-up effect) in which the total number of prize balls is counted up on the screen of the effect display device 60 based on the detection of the entry into the large prize opening in the special game is performed. If the number of prize balls currently acquired is "2000" and there are 15 prize balls, it is possible to execute a production that counts up by 1 like 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → ... 2015) and counts up. When the number of prize balls on the displayed display reaches a specific number, it is possible to execute highlighting that emphasizes that the specific number has been reached (for example, the number of prize balls on the display displayed as a count-up). When the number reaches 2500, the display of "2500" is displayed separately from the display in the count-up effect, which is larger than the number of prize balls on the display displayed in the count-up effect). The specifications described below may be adopted for these effects and displays. When the big prize opening 20 is opened in one unit game, the game ball is closed by entering nine balls (note that the prize ball for one ball is "15"). In this way, the number of game balls, which is the end condition of the unit game (the closing condition of the large winning opening 20), is referred to as a predetermined count number.
(1) A count-up effect corresponding to the entry of game balls within the specified count number (particularly, a count-up effect corresponding to the 9th count, which is the specified count number) is being performed, and 15 balls are still being produced. If an over-winning (balls that exceed the specified count number) occurs when the count-up for the count-up is not completed, all the count-ups for the count-up effect for which the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed are all. It is desirable that the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is started after the completion (after the count for 15 balls is performed). Here, if the over winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (the pause time from the end of each unit game to the start of the setting of the next unit game or the end demo), the over prize is detected. The count-up effect itself corresponding to the winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (next round starting after the interval period has elapsed), but the next round (next round starting after the interval period has elapsed) ) Is executed, even if there is a ball in the large winning opening 20 during the execution of the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning, the counting-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is performed. When the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed yet, the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed. After all the count-ups for the count-up effect have been completed (the count for 15 balls has not been completed). After that, it is preferable that the count-up effect corresponding to the entry of the large winning opening 20 in the next round is started.
(2) The count-up time for one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N + 1") is set to "0.03 seconds", that is, in increments of "0.03 seconds". Is counted up. The execution time of the count-up effect is the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given by one game ball entering the large winning opening 20 in the time value required for counting up for one prize ball. Derived by multiplying the values, the execution time of the count-up effect is "15 (number of unit prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". However, even during the execution of the special game, the count-up effect is not executed during the execution of the start demo and the execution of the end demo. Further, the execution time of the count-up effect is set shorter than the interval time (also referred to as “interval period”) set after the end of each unit game. The interval time is a waiting time set between each unit game or between the final unit game and the end demo, and is a period during which the closing operation of the large winning opening 20 is maintained from the start of the closing operation. It is a waiting time or a waiting time for the end demo, and is set to "2 seconds" in all round games. Further, by configuring the count-up effect time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), the game ball enters the large winning opening 20 just before the end of a certain unit game. Even when the count-up effect is performed based on the above, the count-up effect is completed within the interval time after the end of the unit game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the count-up effect will be performed over the interval period until the next unit game or the end demo (if the over prize is won, the interval period may be exceeded). , The division between each unit game or the division between the final unit game and the end demo can be clarified.
(3) The count-up effect time is set shorter than the execution time of the end demo. As described above, the count-up effect time is set to "0.45 seconds". The execution time of the end demo is set to "20 seconds", which is common to all jackpot types (staging during jackpot). The execution time of the end demo is the waiting time from the time when the interval time after the end of the last unit game in the special game elapses to the end of the special game. That is, the execution time of the end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the last unit game. That is, during the interval time after the end of the final unit game, the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 20 is effectively detected (that is, it is detected as a target for paying out the winning ball, and it is determined that the ball is illegally entered. It is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the unit game that may be detected), but the execution time of the end demo is valid for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 20 within that time. It is set as the preparation time for the game (effect mode) after the end of the special game separated from the unit game, which is unlikely to be detected in. By configuring the count-up production time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the end demo, the game ball enters the large winning opening 20 just before the end of the final unit game. Even if the count-up effect is performed based on the ball, even if an over-winning occurs in the final unit game, the large winning opening 20 is closed after the final unit game. If the specifications are such that the count-up effect is performed even later (even during the end demo period), the count-up effect will be completed within the end demo period. Therefore, the count-up effect is not performed over the end demo period until the variation display after the end of the special game, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variation display of the first rotation is clarified. can do.
(4) When a specified number of game balls enter the large winning opening 20 in one unit game, the total time of the count-up production time for the specified number of counts in this one unit game (one unit). The count-up effect for the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up effect time for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds". On the other hand, as described above, the execution time of the big hit end demo is set to "20 seconds", which is common to all big hit types (big hit medium production). In the present embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up production time for the specified number of counts is set to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that the unit of the final round is set. Even if a plurality of count-up effects are continuously performed based on a plurality of game balls continuously entering the large winning opening 20 just before the end of the game, after the final unit game. If the specification is such that the count-up effect is performed even after the big winning opening 20 is closed (even during the big hit end demo period), the count-up effect will be completed within the big hit end demo period. Therefore, the count-up effect does not extend beyond the jackpot end demo period to the variable display after the end of the special game, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display of the first rotation is clarified. Can be.

The techniques described in Examples and Modifications may be specified by the following aspects.

[First aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing lottery means for executing a winning / failing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the determination result of the winning / failing lottery is variablely displayed, and
A variation pattern determining means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the symbol is defined, and
When a new ball is entered in the starting winning opening, if the symbol variation corresponding to the previous entry is displayed, the lottery value corresponding to the new entry is stored as a hold up to the predetermined number. Hold control means and
A staging display device that displays staging content, and a staging display device
A staging determination means for determining the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device, and
A staging display control means for displaying the staging content determined by the staging determining means on the staging display device is provided.
When there is a new ball entry, advance information regarding the lottery value corresponding to the ball entry is transmitted to the staging determination means.
As the effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included.
It is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined mode and the second image not deformed into the predetermined mode.
Based on the prior information, it is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests the special game transition expectation level related to the hold corresponding to the prior information with the symbol change before the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to the prior information. can be,
The specific effect has a plurality of types, and the specific effect is executed according to the type of the specific effect executed by the symbol change prior to the symbol change related to the hold that triggered the execution of the specific effect. A ball game machine characterized in that the degree of expectation of whether or not the special effect is executed differs depending on the symbol change related to the pending hold.

[Second aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing lottery means for executing a winning / failing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a special symbol for showing the determination result of the winning / failing lottery is variablely displayed, and
A variation pattern determining means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the special symbol is defined, and
A staging display device that displays staging content, and a staging display device
A predetermined movable accessory that is provided in the vicinity of the effect display device and operates in an effect manner in conjunction with the effect displayed on the effect display device.
A staging determination means for determining the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device, and
A staging control means for displaying the staging content determined by the staging determining means on the staging display device is provided.
It has a decorative symbol that is a symbol that indicates the determination result of the winning / failing lottery, and the decorative symbol is a normal decorative symbol that is displayed as a main symbol on the effect display device at least when the special symbol is stopped. Including a simple decorative symbol displayed in a display form simplified from the normal decorative symbol.
As the effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included.
It is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined mode and the second image not deformed into the predetermined mode.
When the special effect is executed, the operation of the predetermined movable accessory is relatively often executed in parallel, as compared with the case where the special effect is not executed.
In the special effect, the normal decorative symbol may be included in the first image belonging to the first image group, but the simple decorative symbol may be included in the second image belonging to the second image group. Bullet game machine to play.

[Third aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing lottery means for executing a winning / failing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which symbols for showing the determination result of the winning / failing lottery are displayed in a variable manner, and
A variation pattern determining means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the symbol is defined, and
A staging display device that displays staging content, and a staging display device
A staging determination means for determining the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device, and
A staging display control means for displaying the staging content determined by the staging determining means on the staging display device is provided.
As the effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included.
It is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined mode and the second image not deformed into the predetermined mode.
A ball game machine characterized in that the second image, which is not the target of deformation in the special effect, is a common image even if the type of the first image to be deformed in the special effect is different.

[Fourth aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing lottery means for executing a winning / failing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the determination result of the winning / failing lottery is variablely displayed, and
A variation pattern determining means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the symbol is defined, and
A staging display device that displays staging content, and a staging display device
A staging determination means for determining the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device, and
A staging display control means for displaying the staging content determined by the staging determining means on the staging display device is provided.
As the effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included.
It is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined mode and the second image not deformed into the predetermined mode.
When a predetermined error occurs, a warning image indicating that the predetermined error has occurred can be displayed.
When the special effect is started to be executed in a situation where the warning image is displayed due to the occurrence of the predetermined error before the execution of the special effect is started, the warning image is not transformed into the predetermined mode. A bullet game machine characterized in that the display is continued while maintaining the display mode before the start of execution of the special effect.

[Fifth aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing lottery means for executing a winning / failing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the determination result of the winning / failing lottery is variablely displayed, and
A variation pattern determining means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the symbol is defined, and
When a new ball is entered in the starting winning opening, if the symbol variation corresponding to the previous entry is displayed, the lottery value corresponding to the new entry is stored as a hold up to the predetermined number. Hold control means and
A staging display device that displays staging content, and a staging display device
A staging determination means for determining the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device, and
A staging display control means for displaying the staging content determined by the staging determining means on the staging display device is provided.
As the effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included.
It is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined mode and the second image not deformed into the predetermined mode.
It is possible to display the hold image corresponding to the hold triggered by the occurrence of the hold corresponding to the new ball entry.
When displaying the reserved image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display.
Even if the display of the reserved image is started with the predetermined animation display before the execution of the special effect is started and the special effect is started to be executed during the execution of the predetermined animation display, the predetermined effect is executed. A bullet game machine characterized in that the animation display of is continuously executed without being stopped.

[Sixth aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing lottery means for executing a winning / failing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the determination result of the winning / failing lottery is variablely displayed, and
A variation pattern determining means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the symbol is defined, and
When a new ball is entered in the starting winning opening, if the symbol variation corresponding to the previous entry is displayed, the lottery value corresponding to the new entry is stored as a hold up to the predetermined number. Hold control means and
A staging display device that displays staging content, and a staging display device
A staging determination means for determining the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device, and
A staging display control means for displaying the staging content determined by the staging determining means on the staging display device is provided.
When there is a new ball entry, advance information regarding the lottery value corresponding to the ball entry is transmitted to the staging determination means.
As the effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included.
It is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined mode and the second image not deformed into the predetermined mode.
Based on the prior information, it is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests the special game transition expectation level related to the hold corresponding to the prior information with the symbol change before the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to the prior information. can be,
With a plurality of types of the specific effect, the execution trigger of the specific effect is according to the type of the specific effect executed by the symbol change prior to the symbol change related to the hold that triggered the execution of the specific effect. The degree of expectation of whether or not the special effect is executed differs depending on the symbol change related to the pending hold.
It is possible to form a reach state during the symbol variation regardless of whether the symbol variation is such that the special effect is executed or the special effect is not executed.
In the case of the symbol variation forming the reach state, the degree of expectation of whether or not the special effect is executed by the symbol variation differs depending on the type of the symbol forming the reach state. Ball game machine.

[7th aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing lottery means for executing a winning / failing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a special symbol for showing the determination result of the winning / failing lottery is variablely displayed, and
A variation pattern determining means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the special symbol is defined, and
A staging display device that displays staging content, and a staging display device
A predetermined movable accessory that is provided in the vicinity of the effect display device and operates in an effect manner in conjunction with the effect displayed on the effect display device.
A staging determination means for determining the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device, and
A staging control means for displaying the staging content determined by the staging determining means on the staging display device is provided.
It has a decorative symbol that is a symbol that indicates the determination result of the winning / failing lottery, and the decorative symbol is a normal decorative symbol that is displayed as a main symbol on the effect display device at least when the special symbol is stopped. Including a simple decorative symbol displayed in a display form simplified from the normal decorative symbol.
As the effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included.
It is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined mode and the second image not deformed into the predetermined mode.
When the special effect is executed, the operation of the predetermined movable accessory is relatively often executed in parallel, as compared with the case where the special effect is not executed.
In the special effect, the normal decorative symbol may be included in the first image belonging to the first image group, but the simple decorative symbol may be included in the second image belonging to the second image group.
Even during the execution of the special effect, the volume adjustment based on the player's operation can be executed, and when the volume adjustment is executed, the volume setting image can be displayed.
When the special effect is started to be executed in a situation where the volume adjustment image is displayed before the execution of the special effect is started, the volume adjustment image is not deformed to the predetermined mode and before the execution of the special effect is started. A ball game machine characterized in that the display mode is maintained and the display is continued.

[8th aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing lottery means for executing a winning / failing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the determination result of the winning / failing lottery is variablely displayed, and
A variation pattern determining means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the symbol is defined, and
A staging display device that displays staging content, and a staging display device
A staging determination means for determining the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device, and
A staging display control means for displaying the staging content determined by the staging determining means on the staging display device is provided.
As the effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included.
It is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined mode and the second image not deformed into the predetermined mode.
Even if the type of the first image that is the target of deformation in the special effect is different, the second image that is not the target of deformation in the special effect is a common image.
When a predetermined error occurs, a warning image indicating that the predetermined error has occurred can be displayed.
A ball game machine characterized in that when the predetermined error occurs during the execution of the special effect, the warning image is displayed without being deformed into the predetermined mode.

[9th aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing lottery means for executing a winning / failing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the determination result of the winning / failing lottery is variablely displayed, and
A variation pattern determining means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the symbol is defined, and
When a new ball is entered in the starting winning opening, if the symbol variation corresponding to the previous entry is displayed, the lottery value corresponding to the new entry is stored as a hold up to the predetermined number. Hold control means and
A staging display device that displays staging content, and a staging display device
A staging determination means for determining the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device, and
A staging display control means for displaying the staging content determined by the staging determining means on the staging display device is provided.
When there is a new ball entry, advance information regarding the lottery value corresponding to the ball entry is transmitted to the staging determination means.
As the effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included.
It is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined mode and the second image not deformed into the predetermined mode.
Based on the prior information, it is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests the special game transition expectation level related to the hold corresponding to the prior information with the symbol change before the symbol change related to the hold corresponding to the prior information. can be,
When a predetermined error occurs, a warning image indicating that the predetermined error has occurred can be displayed.
When the special effect is started to be executed in a situation where the warning image is displayed due to the occurrence of the predetermined error before the execution of the special effect is started, the warning image is not transformed into the predetermined mode. The display is continued while maintaining the display mode before the start of execution of the special effect.
A ball gaming machine characterized in that when a hold corresponding to a new ball entry occurs during the execution of the special effect, the execution of the specific effect corresponding to the hold is restricted.

[10th aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing lottery means for executing a winning / failing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a special symbol for showing the determination result of the winning / failing lottery is variablely displayed, and
A variation pattern determining means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the special symbol is defined, and
A staging display device that displays staging content, and a staging display device
A staging determination means for determining the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device, and
A staging control means for displaying the staging content determined by the staging determining means on the staging display device is provided.
It has a decorative symbol that is a symbol that indicates the determination result of the winning / failing lottery, and the decorative symbol is a normal decorative symbol that is displayed as a main symbol on the effect display device at least when the special symbol is stopped. Including a simple decorative symbol displayed in a display form simplified from the normal decorative symbol.
As the effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included.
It is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined mode and the second image not deformed into the predetermined mode.
It is possible to display the hold image corresponding to the hold triggered by the occurrence of the hold corresponding to the new ball entry.
When displaying the reserved image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display.
Even if the display of the reserved image is started with the predetermined animation display before the execution of the special effect is started and the special effect is started to be executed during the execution of the predetermined animation display, the predetermined effect is executed. The animation display of is continuously executed without being stopped,
At a predetermined timing in the special effect, the simple decorative symbol may be overlapped with the special first image and the second image in the special effect, while the normal decorative symbol is the same as the special first image in the special effect. Is a ball game machine that can be duplicated but not duplicated with the second image.

[11th aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing lottery means for executing a winning / failing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which a symbol for showing the determination result of the winning / failing lottery is variablely displayed, and
A variation pattern determining means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the symbol is defined, and
When a new ball is entered in the starting winning opening, if the symbol variation corresponding to the previous entry is displayed, the lottery value corresponding to the new entry is stored as a hold up to the predetermined number. Hold control means and
A staging display device that displays staging content, and a staging display device
A staging determination means for determining the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device, and
A staging display control means for displaying the staging content determined by the staging determining means on the staging display device is provided.
It is possible to execute a special effect in which a predetermined effect content displayed on the effect display device is paused and displayed at a predetermined timing.
With the occurrence of a hold corresponding to a new ball entry, the hold image corresponding to the hold can be displayed, and among the hold images, the hold image corresponding to the lottery value at which the symbol variation display is started is , Can be displayed as a changing image corresponding to the symbol fluctuation display,
A ball gaming machine characterized in that the reserved image is hidden while the special effect is being executed, while the changing image is continuously displayed.

[12th aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
A staging determination means for determining one from a plurality of types of staging patterns as the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device.
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content based on the determined effect pattern on the effect display device, and
Equipped with
The effect display control means has a frame buffer for temporarily storing a frame image constituting a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device.
The frame buffer is
A first buffer area capable of storing a frame image having a first display size exceeding the screen area size of the effect display device, and a first buffer area.
A second buffer area that is different from the first buffer area and can store a frame image having a second display size that is equal to or smaller than the screen area size of the staging display device.
Including at least
The multiple types of staging patterns include
The first buffer area is used as a frame buffer, and the frame image of the first display size stored in the first buffer area at a predetermined timing is deformed so that it can be displayed in the screen area of the staging display device. A first special effect for displaying a moving image on the effect display device is defined by sequentially generating a new frame image obtained by synthesizing the image and the image showing the game situation and storing it in the first buffer area. The first special production pattern and
The second buffer area was used as a frame buffer, and a deformed image of the frame image of the second display size stored in the second buffer area at a predetermined timing and an image showing a game situation were combined. A second special effect different from the first special effect is defined, which is an effect of displaying a moving image on the effect display device by sequentially generating new frame images and storing them in the second buffer area. The second special production pattern and
A ball game machine characterized by including.

[13th aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
A staging determination means for determining one from a plurality of types of staging patterns as the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device.
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content based on the determined effect pattern on the effect display device, and
Equipped with
The effect display control means has a frame buffer for temporarily storing a frame image constituting a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device, and the frame buffer has a plurality of buffer areas capable of storing each frame image. Including,
In each of the plurality of types of effect patterns, which of the plurality of buffer areas is used as the frame buffer is determined, and the frame image stored in the buffer area at a predetermined timing is deformed and the game situation. A plurality of special effect patterns in which a special effect for displaying a moving image on the effect display device by sequentially generating a new frame image obtained by synthesizing the image indicating the above and storing it in the buffer area is included.
The effect display control means is
It is stipulated that different buffer areas should be used for multiple special staging patterns that are designed so that execution timings can overlap within the same fluctuation.
For multiple special effect patterns designed so that the execution timings do not overlap within the same fluctuation, when the display of the effect by the other special effect pattern is started even though the effect by one special effect pattern is being displayed. , A ball game machine characterized in that the effect of the other special effect pattern determined later is prioritized over the effect of the one of the special effect patterns displayed earlier.

[14th aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
A staging determination means for determining one from a plurality of types of staging patterns as the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device.
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content based on the determined effect pattern on the effect display device, and
Equipped with
A main image portion having a display size that can be displayed in the screen area of the effect display device and an outer frame image portion formed so as to surround the outer periphery of the main image portion constitute one effect image.
In the effect image in the initial situation, a part or all of the outer frame image portion is not displayed in the screen area of the effect display device.
In the effect image in a predetermined situation different from the initial situation, a part or all of the outer frame image portion that was not displayed in the screen area of the effect display device in the initial situation is A new frame image in which an image in which at least one of the display ratio and the shape of the effect image is changed and an image showing the game situation are sequentially combined so that the image can be displayed in the screen area of the effect display device is sequentially generated. A bullet game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a moving image on the effect display device by generating it.

[15th aspect]
A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a big hit, and
A production display device that displays the content of the production, and
A staging determination means for determining one from a plurality of types of staging patterns as the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device.
An effect display control means for displaying the effect content based on the determined effect pattern on the effect display device, and
Operation input means that accepts operation input by the player,
Equipped with
The effect display control means has a frame buffer for temporarily storing a frame image constituting a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device, and the frame buffer has a plurality of buffer areas capable of storing each frame image. Including,
In the plurality of types of effect patterns, when the operation input of the operation input means is performed, a new frame image obtained by synthesizing an image obtained by deforming the frame image at the operation input timing and an image showing a game situation is provided. The moving image is displayed on the effect display device by sequentially generating and storing it in the first buffer area, and when the operation input of the operation input means is further performed, the first buffer at the operation input timing is performed. By sequentially generating a new frame image in which a deformed image of the frame image stored in the area and an image showing the game situation are combined and storing it in the second buffer area, a moving image is displayed in the effect display device. A bullet game machine characterized by including a special effect pattern in which a special effect to be displayed is defined.

60 effect display device, 80 game board, 81 game area, 210 lottery means, 230 variation pattern determination means, 240 hold control means, 303 effect display control means, 305 effect display control means, 338 frame buffer, 502 normal decorative pattern, 504 simple Decorative design, 506 Normal hold image, 507 Simple hold image, 508 Floating image, 510 Frame image, 514 Frame image, 516 Target object, 518 Background image, 591 Frame image, 520 Movable accessory, 532 Volume setting image, 536 Error warning image, 540 first buffer area, 542 second buffer area, 550 button image.

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed,
A start winning opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery,
A winning / failing lottery means for executing a winning / failing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to shift from a normal game to a special game that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the starting winning opening. ,
A symbol display device in which symbols for showing the determination result of the winning / failing lottery are displayed in a variable manner, and
A variation pattern determining means for selecting one from a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the symbol is defined, and
A staging display device that displays staging content, and a staging display device
A staging determination means for determining the staging content to be displayed on the staging display device, and
A staging display control means for displaying the staging content determined by the staging determining means on the staging display device is provided.
As the effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included.
It is possible to execute a special effect of displaying a special first image obtained by transforming the first image into a predetermined mode and the second image not deformed into the predetermined mode.
When a predetermined error occurs, a warning image indicating that the predetermined error has occurred can be displayed.
When the special effect is started to be executed in a situation where the warning image is displayed due to the occurrence of the predetermined error before the execution of the special effect is started, the warning image is not transformed into the predetermined mode. The display is continued while maintaining the display mode before the start of execution of the special effect.
An error warning sound can be output along with the display of the warning image.
The volume can be adjusted even while the error warning sound is being output, and the volume setting image for adjusting the volume can be displayed.
The warning image and the volume setting image are not displayed on top of each other.
The volume can be adjusted and the volume setting image can be displayed even while the special effect is being executed.
Even when the special effect is executed under the condition that the volume setting image is displayed before the execution of the special effect, the volume setting image is not transformed into the predetermined mode, and the volume setting image is displayed. The display can be continued as it is, and the volume can be adjusted.
When there is a new ball, advance information regarding the lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determining means.
Based on the prior information, the effect determining means performs a specific effect suggesting a special game transition expectation degree related to the hold of the lottery value corresponding to the advance information, and a symbol related to the hold of the lottery value corresponding to the advance information. It is possible to execute with the symbol fluctuation before the fluctuation,
The effect determining means can display a hold image corresponding to the hold when a hold corresponding to a new entry occurs.
When displaying the reserved image, the effect determining means can start the display with a predetermined animation display.
The effect determining means starts the display of the reserved image with the predetermined animation display before the execution of the special effect is started, and the special effect is started to be executed during the execution of the predetermined animation display. Even if there is, the predetermined animation display is not stopped and is continuously executed.
The effect determining means includes a first effect pattern, which is an effect pattern for executing the predetermined animation display without executing the specific effect, triggered by the occurrence of a hold corresponding to a new ball entry, and the effect determination means. It has a second effect pattern, which is an effect pattern for executing the predetermined animation display with the execution of a specific effect.
The effect determining means may execute the first effect pattern, but does not execute the second effect pattern, when a new hold occurs during the execution of the special effect.
The effect determining means does not execute the special effect while displaying the standby demo screen that may be displayed during the game standby.
A ball gaming machine characterized in that the execution period of the special effect by the effect determining means is longer than the display period of the predetermined animation display .

Images